Platform Management Interface” (IPMI) initiative with the objective of defining a standardized, abstract, message-based interface between the central system controller (Baseboard Management Controller - BMC) and intelligent hardware for platform management. For further details on IPMI, please refer to

section

"IPMI - technical background" on page 26 .

The integrated Remote Management Controller iRMC represents a BMC with integrated LAN connection and extended functionality. In this way, the iRMC offers comprehensive control over PRIMERGY servers, irrespective of the system status. In particular, the iRMC allows for out-of-band management

(Lights Out Management, LOM) of PRIMERGY servers. Out-of-band management uses of a dedicated management channel that enables a system administrator to monitor and manage servers via remote control regardless of whether the server is powered on.

Figure 1: iRMC S4 on the system board of a PRIMERGY server iRMC S4

Preface

As an autonomous system on the system board of a modern PRIMERGY server, the iRMC has its own operating system, its own web server, separate user management and independent alert management. The iRMC remains powered up even when the server is in stand-by mode.

Beyond making it possible to manage a PRIMERGY server out-of-band, the enhanced functionality of the newest version of the iRMC, which comes with an integrated SD card, allows for comprehensive lifecycle management of a

PRIMERGY server. As life cycle management is largely integrated

("embedded") in and entirely controlled by the iRMC, it is called "embedded Life

Cycle Management (eLCM)".

Some eLCM functions require the iRMC to communicate and cooperate with the

ServerView Agentless Service running on the managed server. Communicating with the ServerView Agentless Service also provides the iRMC S4 with additional in-band information.

This manual describes how to configure the iRMC and the various user interfaces available.

iRMC

Purpose and target groups of the manual

1.1 Purpose and target groups of the manual

●

This manual is aimed at system administrators, network administrators, and service staff who have a sound knowledge of hardware and software. It provides basic information on the technology behind IPMI and deals with the following aspects in detail:

Logging on to the iRMC

Configuring the iRMC

User management on the iRMC

Advanced Video Redirection via iRMC

Virtual Media via iRMC iRMC web interface

Telnet/SSH-based interface (Remote Manager) of the iRMC

Configuring the iRMC with the Server Configuration Manager

Updating the firmware

Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC

Appendix IPMI OEM Commands

– IPMI OEM Commands

– Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

Service

If you have any further questions on remote management for PRIMERGY servers, contact the service and support partners responsible for you.

Other information

http://www.ts.fujitsu.com

iRMC S4

Functions of the iRMC S4

1.2 Functions of the iRMC S4 (overview)

The iRMC supports a wide range of functions that are provided by default. With

Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) and Virtual Media, the iRMC also provides two additional advanced features for the remote management of PRIMERGY servers. To use AVR, virtual Media and embedded Lifecycle Management

(eLCM), you require a valid license key, which can be purchased separately.

Standard functions of the iRMC S4

● Browser access

The iRMC features its own web server which can be accessed by the management station from a standard web browser.

● Security (SSL, SSH)

Secure access to the Web server and secure graphical console redirection including mouse and keyboard can be provided over HTTPS/SSL. An encrypted connection protected using SSH mechanisms can be set up to access the iRMC using the Remote Manager. The Remote Manager is an alphanumeric user interface for the iRMC.

●

ServerView Integration

The ServerView agents detect the iRMC and automatically assign it to the relevant server. This means that it is possible to start the iRMC web interface and text console redirection using the ServerView Remote Management

Front end directly from ServerView Operations Manager.

Communication between the iRMC and the ServerView Agentless Service

(as of ServerView Operations Manager 7.0) allows for enhanced out-ofband management of PRIMERGY servers.

●

Power management

Irrespective of the status of the system, you have the following options for powering the managed server up or down from the remote workstation

– using the iRMC web interface

– using the Remote Manager and the command line interface (CLP)

– with a script.

iRMC

Functions of the iRMC S4

●

Power consumption control

The iRMC allows comprehensive power consumption control on the managed server. In addition, you can specify the mode (minimum power consumption or maximum performance) that the iRMC uses to control power consumption on the managed server. You can switch between these modes as required.

Customer Self Service (CSS)

Summary tables for the server components, sensors and the power supply on the iRMC web interface provide information in a separate column as to whether the server component affected is a CSS component or not. In addition, error list of the system event log (SEL) shows for every event whether it has been triggered by a CSS component.

● Text console redirection

You can start a Telnet/SSH session to the iRMC from the ServerView

Remote Management Front end. This calls the Remote Manager, via which you can start a text console redirection session.

●

Basic functions of a BMC

The iRMC supports the basic functions of a BMC such as voltage monitoring, event logging and recovery control.

“Headless” system operation

●

The managed server does not require a mouse, monitor or keyboard to be connected. The benefits of this include lower costs, far simpler cabling in the rack and increased security.

Identification LED

●

To facilitate identification of the system, for instance if it is installed in a fully populated rack, you can activate the identification LED from the iRMC web interface.

Global error LED

●

A global error LED informs you of the status of the managed system at all times and at the same time shows the CSS (Customer Self Service) status.

Power LED

The power LED informs you whether the server is currently switched on or off.

iRMC S4

Functions of the iRMC S4

● S5 LED

The S5 LED informs you on the power status of the server.

● CIM support

The iRMC supports CIM-XML, WS-Man, and SMASH CLP (System

Management Architecture for Server Hardware Command Line Protocol).

● LAN

On some systems, the LAN interface of the fitted system NIC (Network

Interface Card) on the server is reserved for the management LAN. On other systems, you have the option of configuring this LAN interface to

– reserve it for the management LAN

– set it up for shared operation with the system or

– make it completely available to the system.

The ports marked with a wrench symbol are assigned to the iRMC (see

figure 7 on page 44 ).

● Network Bonding

Network bonding for the iRMC is designed for redundancy in the event of

Ethernet network adapter failures. Thus, iRMC network management traffic is protected from loss of service which occurs due to failure of a single physical link.

The iRMC supports the active-backup mode, i. e. one port is active until the link fails, then the other port takes over the MAC and becomes active.

● SNMPv1/v2c/v3 support

You can configure an SNMP service on the iRMC which supports

SNMPv1/v2c/v3 GET requests on SNMP SC2 MIB (Sc2.mib), SNMP MIB-

2, SNMP OS.MIB, and SNMP STATUS.MIB.

When the SNMP service is enabled, information on devices such as fans, temperature sensors etc. are available via the SNMP protocol and can be viewed on any system running an SNMP Manager.

● Command line interface (CLP)

In addition to the Remote Manager, the iRMC also supports SMASH CLP as standardized by the DMTF (Distributed Management Task Force).

iRMC

Functions of the iRMC S4

●

Simple configuration - interactive or script-based

The following tools are available for configuring the iRMC:

– iRMC web interface

– Server Configuration Manager

– UEFI BIOS Setup

It is also possible to carry out configuration with the Server Configuration

Manager or IPMIVIEW using scripts. This means that it is possible to configure the iRMC when the server is first configured via ServerView

Installation Manager. It is also possible to configure a large number of servers on the basis of scripts.

Support for the LocalView service panel

If PRIMERGY servers are equipped with a ServerView local service panel, this module allows you to determine what module is faulty and whether you can replace the faulty module yourself.

Local user management

The iRMC has its own user management function which allows up to

16 users to be created with passwords and to be assigned various rights depending on the user groups they belong to.

Global user management using a directory service

The global user IDs for the iRMC are stored centrally in the directory service's directory. This makes it possible to manage the user identifications on a central server. They can therefore be used by all the iRMCs that are connected to this server in the network.

The following directory services are currently supported for iRMC user management:

– Microsoft

Active Directory

– Novell

eDirectory

– OpenLDAP

– OpenDS

CAS-based single sign-on (SSO) authentication

The iRMC supports Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) configuration, which allows you to configure the iRMC web interface for CAS-based single sign-on (SSO) authentication. iRMC S4

Functions of the iRMC S4

The first time a user logs in to an application (e.g. the iRMC web interface) within the SSO domain of the CAS service, they are prompted for their credentials by the CAS-specific login screen. Once they have been successfully authenticated by the CAS service, the user is granted access to the iRMC web interface as well as to any other service within the SSO domain without being prompted for login credentials again.

● DNS / DHCP

The iRMC provides support for automatic network configuration. It has a default name and DHCP support is set by default so that the iRMC S4 gets its IP address from the DHCP server. The iRMC name is registered by the

Domain Name System (DNS). Up to five DNS servers are supported. If

DNS/DHCP is not available, the iRMC also supports static IP addresses.

● Power supply

The iRMC is powered by the standby supply of the system.

● Alert management

The alert management facility of the iRMC provides the following options for forwarding alerts (alerting):

– Platform Event Traps (PET) are sent via SNMP.

– Direct alerting by email.

In addition, the iRMC provides the ServerView agents with all the relevant information.

● Read, filter and save the system event log (SEL).

You can view, save and delete the contents of the SEL

– by using the iRMC web interface or

– by using the Telnet/SSH-based interface (Remote Manager) of the iRMC S4.

● Read, filter and save the internal event log (iEL).

You can view, save and delete the contents of the iEL

– by using the iRMC web interface or

– by using the Telnet/SSH-based interface (Remote Manager) of the iRMC S4.

iRMC

Functions of the iRMC S4

● UEFI support

Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) is a specification for a software program that connects a computer's firmware to its operating system. UEFI has a firmware validation process, called secure boot. Secure boot defines how platform firmware manages security certificates, validation of firmware, and a definition of the interface (protocol) between firmware and the operating system.

Extended functionality of the iRMC S4

Alongside the standard functionality, the iRMC also supports the Advanced

Video Redirection, Virtual Media functions, and embedded Lifecycle

Management (eLCM).

●

Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)

The iRMC supports Advanced Video Redirection which offers the following benefits:

– Operation over a standard web browser. No additional software needs to be installed in the management station other than the Java Runtime

Environment.

– System-independent graphical and text console redirection (including mouse and keyboard).

– Remote access for boot monitoring, BIOS administration and operation of the operating system.

– AVR supports up to two simultaneous “virtual connections” for working on a server from a different location. It also reduces the load on the network by using hardware and video compression.

– Local monitor-off support: It is possible to power down the local screen of the managed PRIMERGY server during an AVR session in order to prevent unauthorized persons from observing user input and actions carried out on the local server screen during the AVR session.

– Low bandwidth

In the case of a reduced data transfer rate, you can configure a lower bandwidth (bits per pixel, bpp) in terms of color depth for your current

AVR session. iRMC S4

Functions of the iRMC S4

● Virtual Media

The Virtual Media functionality makes a “virtual” drive available which is physically located on a remote workstation or made available centrally on the network using the Remote Image Mount functionality.

The “virtual” drives available with Virtual Media are simply managed in much the same way as local drives and offer the following options:

– Read and write data.

– Boot from Virtual Media.

– Install drivers and small applications.

– Update BIOS from remote workstation.



(BIOS update via USB)

Virtual Media supports the following device types to provide a “virtual drive” on the remote workstation:

– CD ROM

– DVD ROM

– Memory stick

– Floppy image

– CD ISO image

– DVD ISO image

– Physical Harddisk Drive

– HDD ISO image

The Remote Image Mount functionality provides ISO images centrally on a network share in the form of a “virtual drive”.

●

Embedded Lifecycle Management (eLCM)

The embedded Lifecycle Management (eLCM) solution allows you to control lifecycle management of PRIMERGY servers with a few mouse clicks centrally from the iRMC web interface without the need of handling with physical devices.

eLCM comprises the following functions:

– eLCM update management

– eLCM image management (Custom Image)

– eLCM health management (PrimeCollect)

For details see the manual "ServerView embedded Lifecycle Management

(eLCM)".

iRMC

Communication interfaces of the iRMC S4

1.3 User interfaces of the iRMC S4

The iRMC provides the following communication interfaces:

● iRMC S4 web interface (web interface)

The connection to the iRMC web server is established over a standard web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox).

Among other things, the web interface of the iRMC provides you with access to all system information and data from the sensors such as fan speeds, voltages, etc. You can also configure text-based console redirection and start graphical console redirection (Advanced Video Redirection, AVR). In addition, administrators can fully configure the iRMC over the web interface.

Secure access to the iRMC web server can be provided with HTTPS/SSL.

Operation of the iRMC over the web interface is described in

chapter "iRMC web interface" on page 121 .

●

Remote Manager: Text-based Telnet/SSH interface via LAN

You can call the Remote Manager

– from the ServerView Remote Management Frontend,

– directly from a Telnet/SSH client.

The alphanumeric user interface of the Remote Manager provides you with access to system and sensor information, power management functions and the error event log. In addition, you can launch text console redirection or a

SMASH CLP shell. If you call the Remote Manager over SSH (Secure Shell), the connection between the Remote Manager and the managed server is encrypted.

Operation of the iRMC using the Remote Manager is described in

chapter

"iRMC S4 via Telnet/SSH (Remote Manager)" on page 359

●

Remote Manager (Serial): Text-based serial interface over Serial 1

The Remote Manager (serial) interface is identical to the Remote Manager interface.

iRMC S4

Communication interfaces of the iRMC S4

1.4 Font panel LEDs controlled by the iRMC

The iRMC controls the status LEDs which are located on the front panel of the server. The LEDs and the layout of how they are arranged differ depending on the server type.

Status LEDs on the front panel (Nexperience design):

Status of the Server

AC-OFF

S5 (shutdown)

S0 (power on)

S3 (sleep mode) iRMC not ready

Power-on Delay

LED on the Server

S5 LED (green) Power LED (green)

off on off off off off on on blinking with 1Hz

(BIOS controlled) blinking with 0,5 Hz

(iRMC controlled) on on

Status LEDs on the front panel (legacy design):

Status of the Server Power LED on the Server

AC-OFF

S5 (shutdown)

(power on)

(sleep state) iRMC not ready

Power-on Delay off orange green blinking green with 1Hz

(BIOS controlled) blinking alternately in orange/green with 1 Hz (iRMC controlled) yellow

iRMC

Communication protocols used by the iRMC S4

1.5 Communication protocols used by the iRMC

The communication protocols and ports used by the iRMC are shown in table 1 .

Remote side of the connection

RMCP

HTTP port

HTTPs port

Telnet

SSH

SNMP



(general mess.)

SNMP Trap

LDAP

LDAP SSL

Email / SMTP

CIM

Communication direction iRMC side of the connection



(port no. / protocol)







































623/UDP

80/TCP

443/TCP

3172/TCP

22/TCP

161/UDP

162/UDP

389/TCP/UDP

636/TCP/UDP

25/TCP

5988/CIM-XML

5989/CIM-XML

80/WS-MAN

Table 1: Communication protocols and ports used by the iRMC

Configurable Enabled by



default

no yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes no no no iRMC S4

IPMI - technical background

1.6 IPMI - technical background

The iRMC makes the BMC functions available over the IPMI interface.

Intelligent Platform Management

The “Intelligent Platform Management” initiative is a response to the increasing complexity of modern server systems. A number of manufacturers have joined this initiative in order to come up with a new solution for monitoring these server systems.

The term “Intelligent Platform Management” expresses the core aspect of this approach to the solution: Functions for monitoring and recovery of systems are implemented directly in the hardware and firmware for platform management.

Objective

The objective was to define a standardized, abstract and message-based interface between the central system controller (Baseboard Management

Controller - BMC) and intelligent platform management hardware.

The standardization committees combined the central characteristics of various platform management modules into standardized descriptions.

Definition

The IPMI specification defines:

“IPMI is a hardware level interface specification that is ‘management software neutral’ providing monitoring and control functions that can be exposed through standard management software interfaces such as DMI, WMI, CIM, SNMP, etc.

As a hardware level interface, it sits at the bottom of a typical management software stack” [see section

"IPMI and other management standards" on page 27

Advantage

The IPMI specifications ensure the independence of functions for inventory, logging, recovery and monitoring of a system by the system processor, BIOS or operating system.

This means that a system can still be involved in platform management when it is shut down and turned off.

iRMC

IPMI - technical background

IPMI and other management standards

IPMI is best used in conjunction with system management software running under the relevant operating system. Integration of the IPMI functionality into the management functionality offered by a management application and the operating system results in a powerful platform management environment.

An overview of the relationship between IPMI and the management software

stack is shown by figure 2

Figure 2: IPMI in the management software stack (source: IPMI specification, see section

"References" on page 33

)

IPMI, IPMB and ICMB

The IPMI initiative resulted in three central standards:

–

IPMI. Intelligent Platform Management Interface Specification

 describes the higher-level architecture, the current commands, event formats, data packets and properties that are used in IPMI-based systems.

–

IPMB. Intelligent Platform Management Bus

 is an I

C based (write only) bus, which provides a standardized connection between various modules in a common housing.



IPMB can also be used as a standardized interface for remote management modules.

iRMC S4

IPMI - technical background

–

ICMB. Intelligent Chassis Management Bus



(Not currently implemented in the ServerView remote management environment.)

 provides a standardized interface for exchange of platform management information and for control across systems. ICMB is designed in such a way that it can be implemented with a device that is connected to the IPMB.

IPMI implementation

The core element of an IPMI implementation is the Baseboard Management

Controller (BMC).



The BMC performs the following tasks:

– The BMC organizes the interface between the system management software and the platform management hardware.

– It provides autonomous functions for monitoring, event logging and recovery control.

– The BMC acts as a gateway between the system management software and

IPMB.

IPMI allows platform management to be extended: Additional management controllers can be connected via the IPMB. The IPMB is an I

C based serial bus, which runs between the main modules of the system. It is used for communication with and between the management controllers.

With the support of multiple management controllers, IPMI provides a scalable architecture: A complex server system can use multiple controllers for monitoring different subsystems, e.g. power supplies, hot swap RAID drive modules etc.

In addition, IPMI provides ‘low level’ I

C commands, which can be accessed via a management controller connected to the IPMB on 'unintelligent' I

C modules that cannot process IPMI commands.

An overview of the fundamental elements of an IPMI implementation is available in

figure 3 on page 29 .

iRMC

IPMI - technical background

Figure 3: IPMI block diagram (source: IPMI specification, see section



"References" on page 33 )

iRMC S4

IPMI - technical background

IPMI and “in band” and “out of band” management

In the field of system management, a distinction is made between “in-band” and

“out-of-band” management:

– The term “in-band” management is used when the operating system is running on the managed server.

– The term “out-of-band” management is used when the operating system is not running on the managed server, for instance if the hardware is faulty.

As different interfaces are available in an environment with IPMI compatible systems, you can manage IPMI compatible systems either “in band” or “out of band”.

IPMI-over-LAN

“IPMI-over-LAN” is the current name for the specification of the LAN interface in the IPMI standard. This specification stipulates how IPMI messages can be sent to or from the BMC of a managed system - encapsulated in RMCP (Remote

Management Control Protocol) data packets. These RMCP data packets are transferred via an Ethernet LAN connection using the UDP (User Datagram

Protocol) under IPv4 (Internet Protocol Version 4).

The RMCP protocol has been specified to support the management of system statuses in which the operating system is not running. The RMCP is a simple inquiry/response protocol.

The interface for such a connection is provided on an onboard LAN controller assigned to the BMC.

The interface can only be provided by an on-board LAN controller, not by an inserted LAN card.

iRMC

IPMI - technical background

Of the two ports that RCMP uses under UDP, the BMC communicates with the

LAN controller via port 623 (primary RMCP Port).

Figure 4: BMC and LAN controller

Serial Over LAN interface (SOL)

“Serial Over LAN” is an interface compliant with the IPMI V2.0 standard, which controls transfer of serial data over a LAN connection. In particular, SOL specifies the packet formats and protocols for transferring serial data streams over a LAN between the serial controller on the managed computer and a remote workstation. SOL is based on the IPMI-over-LAN specification.

In order to establish an SOL connection, a remote management application first initiates an IPMI-over-LAN session with the BMC. After this has been done, the

SOL services can be activated from the remote workstation. The data traffic between the serial controller and the remote workstation is handled over the same IPMI session as the IPMI commands.

As soon as an SOL connection has been established, data transfer between the serial controller and the remote workstation is carried out as follows:

– Transfer from the serial controller to the remote workstation:



The data stream issued by the serial controller is partitioned by the BMC, packaged and then sent to the remote workstation over the LAN.

– Transfer from the remote workstation to the serial controller:



BMC unpacks the characters contained in the packages sent by the remote workstation and forwards them to the serial controller as a character stream.

iRMC S4

IPMI - technical background

Figure 5: BMC and SOL

The SOL character data is then exchanged between the BMC of the managed system and the remote workstation as SOL messages. The SOL messages are encapsulated in RMCP+ data packets and transferred in UDP datagrams over an Ethernet LAN connection using IPv4 (Internet Protocol Version 4). The

RMCP+ protocol is based on the RMCP protocol, but includes extensions for encryption, authentication, etc.

Serial over LAN permits “headless” management by console redirection by both the BIOS and the operating system of the managed server. High-cost concentrator solutions are not required.

Channel concept under IPMI

‘Channels’ provide the mechanisms with which IPMI messages are routed to the BMC via various connection carriers. Up to nine channels can be supported.

The system interface and the primary IPMB are fixed. The other seven channels are available for the implementation.

Channels can be either ‘session based’ or ‘sessionless’. The ‘session’ concept has two meanings: It is either a concept for user authentication (see the section

"User identifications" on page 33

) or a concept for routing multiple IPMI message streams via a single channel.

Examples of ‘session based’ channels are LAN channels or serial / modem channels. Examples of ‘sessionless’ channels are the system interface and the

IPMB.

iRMC

Data Center Management Interface (DCMI)

User identifications

For ‘session based’ channels (see the section

"Channel concept under IPMI" on page 32 ), a user login is necessary. By contrast, the ‘sessionless’ channels

have no user authentication.

Under IPMI, the user configuration is channel specific. Thus, users can have different privileges depending on whether they are accessing the BMC via the

LAN channel or the serial channel.

References

Information about the IPMI standards can be found on the Internet:

http://developer.intel.com/design/servers/ipmi/index.htm

1.7 DCMI (Data Center Management Interface)

The iRMC supports the DCMI (Data Center Management Interface) protocol, which is compliant with the IPMI V2.0 standard. DCMI has been designed to improve manageability and energy efficiency of server systems that are deployed in large data centers.

To meet the hardware management requirements of servers within data centers, DCMI supports, among others, the following key features:

– Inventory functions (server identification)

– Power Management and power monitoring

– Power consumption monitoring and control

– Event logging

– Temperature monitoring

Detailed information about DCMI can be found on the DCMI home page:

http://www.intel.com/technology/product/DCMI

iRMC S4

Changes compared with the previous version

1.8 Changes since the previous versions of the manual

This manual refers to the iRMC S4 firmware version 8.0 and replaces the following online manual: “iRMC - integrated Remote Management Controller”,

April 2015 edition.

The manual includes the following updates:

● iRMC web interface:

– New redirection function via HTML5 parallel to the Java based redirection

– New HP SIM integration

– CIM support

With the Common Information Model (CIM), relationship information

(what's connected to what) can be used to help trace the source and status of problems.

●

Extended SNMP support

RESTful API

REST (REpresentational State Transfer) is an architectural style, and an approach to communications that is often used in the development of Web services. When Web services use REST architecture, they are called

RESTful APIs (Application Programming Interfaces) or REST APIs. REST architecture involves reading a designated Web page that contains an XML file.

iRMC

Changes compared with the previous version

1.9 ServerView Suite link collection

Via the link collection, Fujitsu Technology Solutions provides you with numerous downloads and further information on the ServerView Suite and PRIMERGY servers.

For ServerView Suite, links are offered on the following topics:

●

Forum

Service Desk

Manuals

●

Product information

Security information

Software downloads

● Training

The downloads include the following:

– Current software versions for the ServerView Suite as well as additional Readme files.

– Information files and update sets for system software components

(BIOS, firmware, drivers, ServerView agents and ServerView update agents) for updating the PRIMERGY servers via ServerView Update

Manager or for locally updating individual servers via ServerView

Update Manager Express.

– The current versions of all documentation on the ServerView Suite.

You can retrieve the downloads free of charge from the Fujitsu

Technology Solutions Web server.

●

For PRIMERGY servers, links are offered on the following topics:

Service Desk

Manuals

Product information

Spare parts catalogue iRMC S4

Documentation for the ServerView Suite

Access to the link collection

You can reach the link collection of the ServerView Suite in various ways:

1. Via ServerView Operations Manager.

Select Help – Links on the start page or on the menu bar.

This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection.

2. Via the start page of the online documentation for the ServerView Suite on the Fujitsu Technology Solutions manual server.

You access the start page of the online documentation via the following link:

http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com

In the selection list on the left, select x86 Servers.

On the right, click PRIMERGY ServerView Links under Selected documents.

This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection.

3. Via the ServerView Suite DVD 2.

In the start window of the ServerView Suite DVD 2, select the option

Select ServerView Software Products

Ê Click Start. This takes you to the page with the software products of the

ServerView Suite.

On the menu bar select Links.

This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection.

1.10 Documentation for ServerView Suite

The documentation for the ServerView Suite can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet. You will find the online documentation at

http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com

under the link x86 servers.

iRMC

Notational conventions

1.11 Notational conventions

The meanings of the symbols used in this manual are as follows:

Warning This symbol is used to draw attention to risks which may represent a health hazard or which may lead to data loss or damage to the hardware.

This symbol is used to highlight important information and tips.

Text in italics

<text>

This symbol indicates an action which you must carry out.

In running text, commands, menu items, and the names of buttons, options, files and paths are shown in italics.

Indicates variables which must be replaced by current values.

Monospaced font

Output from the system is shown in monospaced font

Monospaced font



Bold monospaced font

Commands to be entered at the keyboard are shown in bold, monospaced font.

[square brackets]

{braces}

[Keyboard] [symbols]

Indicate optional entries.

Indicate a list of alternatives separated by “|”.

Keys are shown as they appear on the keyboard. If uppercase characters are to be entered explicitly, this is indicated for instance by [SHIFT] - [A] for A.

If two keys are to be pressed simultaneously, this is indicated by a hyphen between the two keyboard symbols.

Table 2: Notational conventions

If reference is made to passages elsewhere in this manual, the title of the chapter or section is named and the page number given refers to the start of the section.

iRMC S4

2 Logging on to the iRMC S4 for the first time

The factory default settings of the iRMC allow you to log in to the iRMC S4 for the first time without the need for any configuration activities.

2.1 Requirements

On the remote workstation:

– Windows: Internet Explorer as of Version 10.x.



Linux: Mozilla Firefox 3.x.

– For console redirection:



Sun Java Virtual Machine Version 1.6 or higher.

In your network:

– You must have a DHCP server in your network.

– If you want to log in with a symbolic name rather than an IP address at the iRMC web interface, the DHCP server in your network must be configured for dynamic DNS.

– DNS must be configured. Otherwise you must ask for the IP address.

iRMC S4

iRMC S4 factory defaults

2.2 iRMC S4 factory defaults

The firmware of the iRMC provides a default administrator ID and a default

DHCP name for the iRMC.

Default administrator ID:

Administrator ID

: admin

Password

: admin

Both the administrator ID and the password are case-sensitive.

For reasons of security, it is recommended that you create a new administrator account once you have logged in, and then delete the default administrator account or at least change the password for the account (see

section "User Management" on page 280

Default DHCP name of the iRMC S4

The default DHCP name of the iRMC uses the following pattern:



IRMC<SerialNumber>

The serial number corresponds to the last 3 bytes of the MAC address of the iRMC. You can take the MAC address of the iRMC from the label on your PRIMERGY server.

After you have logged in, the MAC address of the iRMC can be found as a read-only entry above the fields on the page Network Interface (see

page 251 ).

iRMC

Logging into the iRMC S4 web interface

2.3 Logging into the iRMC S4 web interface

Ê Open a web browser on the remote workstation and enter the DNS name or

IP address of the iRMC.

You can take the DNS name of the iRMC from the label on your

PRIMERGY server.

The following login prompt appears:

Figure 6: Login prompt for the iRMC S4 web interface

If the login prompt does not appear, check the LAN connection (see

section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47 ).

Type in the data for the default administrator account.

User name

: admin

Password

: admin

Click OK to confirm your entries.

The iRMC web interface opens showing the System Information page (see

page 133 ).

iRMC S4

3 Configuring the iRMC S4

The following tools are available for configuring the iRMC:

– UEFI setup utility (see

page 46

)

– iRMC web interface (see

page 121

)

– Server Configuration Manager (see

page 387

)

This chapter provides you with information about the following topics:

– Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC using the UEFI setup utility (see

page 46

– Configuring text console redirection via LAN using the UEFI setup utility (see

page 48

–

Configuring the serial interface of the iRMC UEFI setup utility (see page 53 ).

–

Configuring the iRMC over the web interface (for an overview, see page 56 ).

3.1 Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4

This section describes:

– Requirements for configuring the LAN interface

– Configuring the LAN interface in the UEFI setup utility

– Testing the LAN interface



"Spanning Tree" tree for the connection of the iRMC must be deactivated

(e.g. Port Fast=enabled; Fast Forwarding=enabled).

iRMC S4

Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4

3.1.1 Prerequisites

Note the following requirements with respect to configuring the IP address:

– The LAN cable must be connected to the correct port. (see

section

"Connected to the correct LAN port?" on page 44 ).

– Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC and the system (see the

section "Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC and the system" on page 45

3.1.1.1

Connected to the correct LAN port?

The interface for a LAN connection is provided on an onboard LAN controller

assigned to the iRMC (see also figure 4 on page 31

Depending on the server type, the system board of a PRIMERGY server provides two or three LAN interfaces. The ports marked with a wrench symbol

are assigned to the iRMC (in figure 7 , for example, these are port 1 and the top

left-hand port).

Check that the LAN cable is connected to the correct port.

Depending on the type of PRIMERGY server, different ports may be marked with the wrench symbol.

Dedicated Service / Management LAN

(port exclusively for the iRMC S4; with the iRMC S4 a LAN speed up to 1000 MBit/s is available, depending on the server hardware.)

(1)

(2)

Shared LAN

(iRMC S4 and system)

LAN (port exclusively for the system)

Figure 7: Ports for the iRMC S4 (indicated by wrench symbol)

iRMC

Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4

3.1.1.2

Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC and the system

The LAN controller of the PRIMERGY server requires a separate IP address for the iRMC in order to ensure that data packets are reliably transferred to the iRMC (and not to the operating system).

The IP address of the iRMC must be different from that of the system (operating system).

3.1.1.3

Access from a different subnet

If the remote workstation accesses the iRMC of the managed server from a different subnet and DHCP is not used, you must configure the gateway.

3.1.2 Configuring the LAN interface: Configuration tools

You can configure the iRMC’s LAN interface in a number of ways:

Depending on the type of the PRIMERGY server

–

using the UEFI setup utility (see page 46 ),

– iRMC web interface (see

section "Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters" on page 250 ),

– using the Server Configuration Manager (see

chapter "Configuring iRMC S4 using the Server Configuration Manager" on page 387

iRMC S4

Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4

3.1.3 Configuring the LAN interface using the UEFI setup utility

You can configure the iRMC’s LAN interface using the UEFI setup utility:

Ê Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server. Do this by pressing [F2] while the server is booting.

Call the iRMC LAN parameter configuration menu:

Server Mgmt – iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration

Figure 8: iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration Menu

iRMC

Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S4

Ê Configure the following settings:

Management LAN

Set the value to Enabled.

Management LAN Port

The Management setting is recommended.

For details on configuring the remaining settings see

section

"Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters" on page 250

and/or refer to the manual "BIOS (Aptio) Setup Utility" manual corresponding to your server.

Ê Save the settings.

If you want to use console redirection on the iRMC, continue with

section

"Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S4" on page 49 .

If you do not want to use text console redirection on the iRMC, exit the UEFI

setup and continue with the next section "Testing the LAN interface" .

3.1.4 Testing the LAN interface

You can test the LAN interface as follows:

Use a web browser to attempt to log into the iRMC web interface. If no login prompt appears, it is probable that the LAN interface is not working.

Ê Test the connection to the iRMC with a ping command.

iRMC S4

Configuring text console redirection via LAN

3.2 Configuring text console redirection via

LAN using the UEFI setup utility

Text console redirection will be available depending on the configuration of text console redirection and on the operating system of the server

– either for the duration of the BIOS POST phase only or

– beyond the BIOS POST phase while the operating system is running.

This section describes:

– Configuration of text console redirection via LAN using the UEFI setup utility.

– Special requirements of the operating system used that you need to take account of if you also want to use console redirection while the operating system is running.

You can also configure text console redirection via LAN using the

iRMC S4 web interface (see section "BIOS Text Console - Configure and start text console redirection" on page 319 ).

iRMC

Configuring text console redirection via LAN

3.2.1 Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S4

Ê Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server. Do this by pressing [F2] while the server is booting.

Call the Server Mgmt menu:

Figure 9: Server Mgmt Menu

Ê Make the following settings:

Serial Multiplexer

Set the value to iRMC.

iRMC S4

Configuring text console redirection via LAN

Ê Call the Console Redirection menu:

Figure 10: Console Redirection menu

Ê Make the following settings in the Console Redirection menu:

Console Redirection

Set the value to Serial 1. In this case, the terminal uses the first serial interface.

Baud Rate

Specify the baud rate.

Protocol

Leave this setting unchanged. (The setting depends on the terminal type used.)

Flow Control

The setting depends on the terminal type used. The settings must be the same on both terminal and managed server.

Exiting the UEFI setup utility

Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup utility.

Continue with section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47 .

iRMC

Configuring text console redirection via LAN

3.2.2 Using console redirection while the operating system is running

Depending on the operating system used on the managed server, you can continue to use console redirection after the BIOS POST phase.

Windows Server 2008 / 2012

If activated during Windows installation, console redirection is thereby automatically configured.

If console redirection is activated after Windows installation has completed, you must configure console redirection manually.

Windows Server 2008 / 2012 handles console redirection automatically after the

POST phase. No further settings are necessary. While the operating system is booting, the Windows Server SAC console is transferred:

Figure 11: Windows Server SAC console

Linux

You must configure a Linux operating system in such a way that it handles console redirection after the POST phase. Once it has been configured, you have unrestricted access from the remote workstation.

iRMC S4

Configuring text console redirection via LAN

Settings required

The settings may differ between program versions.

You should check the version of your operating system. If the version is different from the versions for which the settings are described below, please refer to the documentation of your operating system.

SuSE and RedHat

Add the following line to the end of the file /etc/inittab: xx:12345:respawn:/sbin/agetty <baud-rate> ttyS0

RedHat

Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /etc/grub.conf: console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0

SuSE

Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /boot/grub/menu.lst: console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0

iRMC

Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4

3.3 Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4

The serial interface of the iRMC allows you to use the terminal application

Remote Manager (Serial) over a null modem cable (see

section "Using the

Remote Manager (Serial) interface" on page 55 ).

3.3.1 Configuring the serial interface using of the iRMC S4

Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server. Do this by pressing [F2] while the server is booting.

Ê Call the Server Mgmt menu:

Figure 12: Server Mgmt menu

Ê Configure the following settings:

Serial Multiplexer

Set the value to iRMC.

iRMC S4

Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4

Ê Call the Serial Port 1 Configuration menu to configure the serial port:

Advanced – Super IO Configuration – Serial Port 1 Configuration

Figure 13: Serial Port 1 Configuration menu

Ê Configure the following settings:

Serial Port

Set the value to Enabled.

Device Settings

Displays the base I/O address and the interrupt used to access the corresponding serial port, e.g. IO=2F8h; IRQ=3.

Accept the value pair proposed.

Exiting the UEFI setup utility

Ê Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup utility.

Continue with section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47 .

iRMC

Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S4

3.3.2 Using the Remote Manager (Serial) interface

If you connect a computer over a null modem cable and start a terminal program

(VT100+) on this computer, you can access the Remote Manager (Serial) terminal program. The Remote Manager (Serial) interface is identical to the

Remote Manager interface (see

chapter "iRMC S4 via Telnet/SSH (Remote

Manager)" on page 359

Prerequisites

On the managed server:

The Serial Multiplexer BIOS setting must be configured on the iRMC (see

section "Configuring the serial interface using of the iRMC S4" on page 53

Terminal program (VT100+):

Configure the following port settings for the terminal program:

Bits per second

Set the value to 38400.

Data bits

Set the value to 8.

Parity

Set the value to None.

Stop bits

Set the value to 1.

Flow Control

Set the value to None.

iRMC S4

Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface

3.4 Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface

Ê Start the iRMC web interface (see

section "Logging into the iRMC web interface" on page 122

3.4.1 Configuring the LAN parameters

In the navigation area, click Network Settings (see

section "Network Settings

- Configure the LAN parameters" on page 250 ).

Configuring the LAN settings

Configure the LAN settings on the Network Interface page. See the section

"Network Interface Settings - Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC" on page 251

for the settings required.

Configuring ports and network services

Ê Configure the ports and network services on the Ports and Network Services

page. See the section "Ports and Network Services - Configuring ports and network services" on page 258 for the settings required.

Configuring DHCP/DNS (Dynamic DNS)

Ê Configure the DHCP and DNS settings in the DNS Configuration page. See the

section "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC" on page 264

for the settings required.

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface

3.4.2 Configuring alerting

The pages for configuring alerting are grouped in the navigation area under

Alerting

(see

section "Alerting - Configure alerting" on page 270

Configuring alert forwarding over SNMP

In the navigation area, click SNMP Traps. The SNMP Traps page appears.

Configure SNMP trap forwarding. See the section "SNMP Trap Alerting -

Configure SNMP trap alerting" on page 271

for the settings required.

Configuring email notification (email alerting)

In the navigation area, click Email. The Email Alerting page appears.

Configure email alerting. See the section "Email Alerting - Configure email alerting" on page 273 for the settings required.

3.4.3 Configuring text console redirection

Configure text console redirection in the BIOS Text Console window. See the

section "BIOS Text Console - Configure and start text console redirection" on page 319 for the settings required.

iRMC S4

Configuring the iRMC S4 over the iRMC S4 web interface

iRMC

4 User management for the iRMC S4

User management for the iRMC uses two different types of user identifications:

– Local user identifications are stored locally in the iRMC’s non-volatile storage and are managed via the iRMC user interfaces.

– Global user identifications are stored in the central data store of a directory service and are managed via this directory service’s interfaces.

The following directory services are currently supported for global iRMC S4 user management:

– Microsoft

Active Directory

– Novell

eDirectory

– OpenLDAP

– OpenDJ

This chapter provides information on the following topics:

– User management concept for the iRMC

– User permissions

– Local user management on the iRMC

For detailed information on the global user management using the individual directory services, please refer to the "User Management in

ServerView" manual.

iRMC S4

Concept

4.1 User management concept for the iRMC

User management for the iRMC permits the parallel administration of local and global user identifications.

When validating the authentication data (user name, password) which users enter when logging in to one of the iRMC interfaces, iRMC proceeds as follows

(see also figure 14 on page 61

1. The iRMC compares the user name and password with the locally stored user identifications:

●

If the user is authenticated successfully by iRMC (user name and password are valid) then the user can log in.

● Otherwise, the iRMC continues the verification with step 2.

2. The iRMC authenticates itself at the directory service via LDAP with a user name and password.

Depending on its LDAP configuration settings, the iRMC continues as follows:

● If ServerView-specific LDAP groups with authorization settings in the SVS structure on the LDAP server are used, the iRMC determines the user’s permissions by using an LDAP query and checks whether the user is authorized to work on the iRMC.

Characteristics:

– Extension of the directory server structure required.

– Privileges / permissions are configured centrally on the directory server.

● If LDAP standard groups are used with authorization settings deposited locally on the iRMC, the iRMC proceeds as follows:

1. The iRMC uses an LDAP query to determine which standard LDAP group on the directory server the user belongs to.

2. The iRMC checks whether a user group with this name is also configured locally on the iRMC. If this applies, the iRMC determines the user’s permissions by means of this local group.

Characteristics:

– No extension of the directory server structure required.

– Privileges / permissions are configured separately on each iRMC.

iRMC

Concept

iRMC S4 web interface

SSL

SSH

Telnet

User name, password

Serial interface

SSL

SSH iRMC S4 local user identifications

SSL

User name, password

LDAP login

SSL

Directory service

Global user identifications

Figure 14: Login authentication via the iRMC S4

Although optional, the use of SSL for the LDAP connection between the iRMC and directory service is recommended. An SSL-secured LDAP connection between iRMC and the directory service guarantees secure data exchange, and in particular the secure transfer of the user name and password data.

SSL login via the iRMC web interface is only required if LDAP is active

(LDAP enable option, see

page 295

). iRMC S4

User permissions

4.2 User permissions

The iRMC distinguishes between two mutually complementary types of user permissions:

– Channel-specific privileges (via assignment to channel-specific permission groups)

– Permissions to use special iRMC functions

The privileges and permissions required for the use of the individual iRMC functions are described

–

for the iRMC-web interface, on page 124 ,

–

for the Remote Manager, on page 369 .

Channel-specific privileges (channel-specific permission groups)

The iRMC assigns each user identification to one of the following four channelspecific permission groups:

– User

– Operator

– Administrator

– OEM

Since iRMC assigns these permissions on a channel-specific basis, users can have different permissions, depending on whether they access the iRMC over the LAN interface or the serial interface.

The scope of permissions granted increases from User (lowest permission level) through Operator and Administrator up to OEM (highest permission level).

The permission groups correspond to the IPMI privilege level. Certain permissions (e. g. for Power Management) are associated with these groups or privilege levels.

Adding the iRMC to the ServerView Operations Manager server list requires LAN channel privilege Administrator or OEM (see the manual

"ServerView Operations Manager").

iRMC

User permissions

Permissions to use special iRMC S4 functions

In addition to the channel-specific permissions, you can also individually assign users the following permissions:

–

Configure User Accounts



Permission to configure local user identifications

–

Configure iRMC Settings



Permission to configure the iRMC settings.

– Video Redirection Enabled



Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) in “View Only” and

“Full Control” mode

–

Remote Storage Enabled



Permission to use the Virtual Media functionality

Preconfigured user ID

The firmware of the iRMC provides a default administrator ID for the iRMC which possesses all permissions:

Administrator ID

: admin

Password

: admin

Both the administrator ID and the password are case-sensitive in the case of local users.

It is urgently recommended that you create a new administrator account as soon as possible once you have logged in, and then delete the default administrator account or at least change the password for the account

(see section "User Management" on page 280 ).

iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

4.3 Local user management for the iRMC S4

The iRMC possesses its own local user management. Up to 16 users to be configured with passwords and be assigned various rights depending on the user groups they belong to. The user identifications are stored in the iRMC S4’s local, non-volatile storage.

The following options are available for user management on the iRMC:

– User management via the web interface

– User management via the Server Configuration Manager

4.3.1 Local user management using the



iRMC S4 web interface

User management on the iRMC requires Configure User Accounts permission.

You can view a list of configured users under the web interface. You can also configure new users, change the configuration of existing users and remove users from the list.

Ê Start the iRMC web interface (see

section "Logging into the iRMC web interface" on page 122

Showing the list of configured users

In the navigation area, click the User Management - iRMC S4 User function.

The User Management page opens containing a list of configured users (see

page 281

). Here, you can delete users and call the page for configuring new users.



This page is described in

section "User Management" on page 280

iRMC

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Configuring new users

Ê On the User Management page, click the New User button.

The New User Configuration page opens. This page allows you to configure the basic settings for the new user. This page is described in

section "New

User Configuration - Configuring a new user" on page 282

Modifying the configuration of a user

On the User Management page, click the name of the user whose configuration parameters you want to change.

The User “<name>” Configuration page opens showing the settings for the selected user. Here, you can change the configuration parameters for the new user. This page is described in

section "User “<name>” Configuration -

User configuration (details)" on page 283 .

Deleting users

Ê On the User Management page, click on the Delete button in the same line as the user to be deleted.

4.3.2 Local user management via the Server

Configuration Manager

Prerequisite:

The current ServerView agents must be installed on the managed server.

User management on the iRMC requires Configure User Accounts permission.

User management via the Server Configuration Manager largely conforms to user management using the iRMC web interface.

In chapter "Configuring iRMC S4 using the Server Configuration Manager" on page 387 is described how to start the Server Configuration Manager.

For details on the individual Configuration Manager dialogs, please refer to the online help of the Server Configuration Manager.

iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

4.3.3 SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC S4 users

In addition to authentication by means of a user name and password, the iRMC S4 also supports SSHv2-based public key authentication using pairs of public and private keys for local users. To implement SSHv2 public key authentication, the SSHv2 key of an iRMC user is uploaded to the iRMC S4 and the iRMC user uses their private key with the program PuTTY or the OpenSSH client program ssh, for example.

The iRMC supports the following types of public keys:

– SSH DSS (minimum requirement)

– SSH RSA (recommended)

The public SSHv2 keys that you upload to the iRMC can be available either in

RFC4716 format or in OpenSSH format (see page 78 ).

Public key authentication

In outline, public key authentication of a user on the iRMC happens as follows:

The user who wishes to log into the iRMC creates the key pair:

– The private key is read-protected and remains on the user's computer.

– The user (or administrator) uploads the public key to the iRMC.

If the configuration allows this, the user can now log into the iRMC extremely securely and without the need to enter a password. The user is only responsible for keeping their private key secret.

The following steps are necessary to set up private key authentication. They are described in the subsequent sections:

1. Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with the program PuTTYgen or

ssh-keygen

and saving them in separate files (see

page 67

2. Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC from a file



(see

page 71

3. Configuring the program PuTTY or ssh for SSHv2 access to the iRMC (see

page 73

iRMC

Local user management for the iRMC S4

4.3.3.1

Creating public and private SSHv2 keys

You can create public and private SSHv2 keys

– with the program PuTTYgen or

– with the OpenSSH client program ssh-keygen.

Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with PuTTYgen

Proceed as follows:

Start PuTTYgen on your Windows computer.

The following window appears when PuTTYgen is started:

Figure 15: PuTTYgen: Creating new private and public SSHv2 keys

Under Parameters, select the key type SSH-2RSA and click Generate to start generation of the keys.

The progress of the generation operation is then displayed under Key (see

figure 16 on page 68

iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Figure 16: PuTTYgen: Creating a new key pair (progress bar).

Ê Move the mouse pointer over the blank area of the progress display to increase the randomness of the generated keys.

When the keys have been generated, PuTTYgen displays the key and the fingerprint of the public SSHv2 key:

Figure 17: PuTTYgen: Creating a new private SSHv2 key (progress bar).

Click Save public key to save the public SSHv2 key to a file. You can upload the public key to the iRMC from this file (see

page 71

Ê Click Save private key to save the private SSHv2 key to a file for use with

PuTTY

(see page 73 ).

iRMC

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with ssh-keygen

If it is not already pre-installed in the Linux distribution you are using, you can obtain OpenSSH from

http://www.openssh.org

You will find a detailed description of the operands in the OpenSSH

OpenSSH manual pages under

http://www.openssh.org/manual.html

Proceed as follows:

Call ssh-keygen to generate an RSA key pair: ssh-keygen -t rsa

ssh-keygen

logs the progress of the key generation operation. ssh-keygen queries the user for the file name under which the private key is to be stored and for the passphrase for the private key. ssh-keygen stores the resulting private and public SSHv2 keys in separate files and displays the fingerprint of the public key.

Example: Generating an RSA key pair with ssh -keygen

5 iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Explanation:

1. ssh-keygen requests the file name under which the SSHv2 key is to be saved. If you press [Enter] to confirm without entering a file name,

ssh-keygen

uses the default file name id_rsa.

2. ssh-keygen requests you to enter a passphrase (and to confirm it) that is used to encrypt the private key. If you press [Enter] to confirm without entering a passphrase, ssh-keygen does not use a passphrase.

3. ssh-keygen informs the user that the newly generated private SSHv2 key has been saved in the file /.ssh/id_rsa.

4. ssh-keygen informs the user that the newly generated public SSHv2 key has been saved in the file /.ssh/id_rsa.pub.

5. ssh-keygen displays the fingerprint of the public SSHv2 key and the local login to which the public key belongs.

iRMC

Local user management for the iRMC S4

4.3.3.2

Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC from a file

Proceed as follows:

Under the iRMC web interface, open the detailed view for the required browser (in this case user3) iRMC S4 User Management page:

(1)

(2)

Figure 18: iRMC web interface: Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC

Click Browse in the group User SSHv2 public key upload from file (1) and navigate to the file containing the required public key (2).

Ê Click Upload to load the public key onto the iRMC.

After the key has been successfully uploaded, the iRMC displays the key fingerprint in the group User SSHv2 public key upload from file: iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Key type Key length MD5 fingerprint of the saved key

Figure 19: Display of the key fingerprint

For reasons of security, make sure that the fingerprint shown here matches that shown in PuTTYgen (see

figure 17 on page 68

) under

Key fingerprint

iRMC

Local user management for the iRMC S4

4.3.3.3

Configuring PuTTY and the OpenSSH client for using the public

SSHv2 key

Configuring PuTTY for using the public SSHv2 key

The PuTTY program allows you to set up a public-key-authenticated connection to the iRMC and log in either under your user name or using the auto-login mechanism. PuTTY handles the authentication protocol automatically on the basis of the public/private SSHv2 key pair previously generated.

Proceed as follows:

Ê Start PuTTY on your Windows computer.

The following window appears when PuTTY is started:

Figure 20: PuTTY: Selecting and loading an SSH session

Ê Select a saved SSH session or create a new SSH session for the iRMC S4 for which you want to use the SSHv2 key. iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Ê Click Load to load the selected SSH session.

This opens the following window:

Figure 21: PuTTY: Loading an SSH session

Ê Choose SSH - Auth to configure the SSH authentication options.

This opens the following window (see

figure 22 on page 75

iRMC

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Figure 22: Configuring the SSH authentication options

Ê Select the file containing the private key that you want to use with the iRMC S4.

Please note:



At this point, you require the private key (see

page 68

) and not the public key that you loaded onto the iRMC.

iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Under Connection - Data, you can additionally specify a user name for automatic login onto the iRMC.

Figure 23: PuTTY: Specifying the user name for automatically logging into the iRMC

Configuring the OpenSSH client program ssh for using the public SSHv2 key

You establish an SSHv2-protected connection to the iRMC using the OpenSSH client program ssh. You can log in either under your current local login or under a different login.

The login must have been configured as a local login on the iRMC and the associated SSHv2 key must have been loaded on the iRMC S4.

ssh

reads its configuration options in order from the following sources:

1. Command line arguments that you specify when calling ssh:

2. User-specific configuration file ($HOME/.ssh/config)

iRMC

Local user management for the iRMC S4

Although this file contains no security-critical information, read/write permission should only be granted to the owner. Access should be denied to all other users.

3. System-wide configuration file (/etc/ssh/ssh_config)

This file contains default values for configuration parameters

– if there is no user-specific configuration file or

– if the relevant parameters are not specified in the user-specific configuration file.

The value found first applies for each option.

You will find detailed information on the configuration of ssh and on its operands on the manual pages for OpenSSH under

http://www.openssh.org/manual.html

Proceed as follows:

Ê Start ssh, to log in to the iRMC under SSHv2-authentication: ssh -l [<user>] <iRMC_S4> or ssh [<user>@]<iRMC_S4>

<user>

User name under which you want to log into the iRMC. If you do not specify <user>, ssh uses the user name under which you are logged into your local computer to log you in to iRMC.

<iRMC_S4> iRMC name or IP address of the iRMC you want to log into.

Example: SSHv2-authenticated login on the iRMC

For the following ssh- call, it is assumed that ssh-keygen has been used to generate a public/private RSA key pair as described under

"Example:

Generating an RSA key pair with ssh -keygen" on page 69 and that the

public key User1/.ssh/id_rsa.pub has been loaded onto the iRMC for an iRMC

user user4 (see page 71 ).

You can then log in from your local computer under $HOME/User1 as follows on the iRMC "RX300_S82-iRMC" using the login user4: ssh user4@RX300_S82-iRMC iRMC S4

Local user management for the iRMC S4

4.3.3.4

Example: Public SSHv2 key

The following shows the same public SSHv2 key in both RFC4716 format and in OpenSSH format.

Public SSHv2 key in RFC4716 format

---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----



Comment: "rsa-key-20090401"



AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABJQAAAIBScBsgP9B74qNa9+w8Ccv3kDVVu2boKCGLv4hx

 v6+AUFrF6sYdGey1QQ7MkwSeax3NmoZBkvkR9hNfZSqxkPCkd//LyUil9US5/9Ar



JxjlhXUzlPPVzuBtPaRB7+bISTJVMUorNwrcN48b6AAoYBhKC4AOtOP1OGsfc+F

 pGJ2iw==



---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----

Public SSHv2 key in OpenSSH format

ssh-rsa

AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABJQAAAIBScBsgP9B74qNa9+w8Ccv3kDVVu2boKCGLv4hx v6+AUFrF6sYdGey1QQ7MkwSeax3NmoZBkvkR9hNfZSqxkPCkd//LyUil9US5/9Ar

JxjlhXUzlPPVzuBtPaRB7+bISTJVMUorNwrcN48b6AAoYBhKC4AOtOP1OGwsfc+F pGJ2iw== rsa-key-20090401

iRMC

5 Advanced Video Redirection

(AVR)

A valid KVM license key is required to use the Advanced Video

Redirection function.

Java caching must not be disabled. Otherwise AVR cannot be started.

(Java caching is enabled by default).

Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) allows you to control the mouse and keyboard of the managed server from your remote workstation and to show the current graphical and text output from the managed server.

The AVR Java applet allows you to use the Virtual Media function (see

chapter "Virtual Media Wizard" on page 111

This chapter provides information on the following topics:

– Checking the AVR settings

– Using AVR via a Java applet

– Using AVR via HTML5 iRMC S4

Prerequisites

5.1 Requirements: Check the AVR settings

Check the following important settings before using AVR:

Graphics mode settings on the managed server

AVR supports the following graphics modes:

Resolution Refresh rates

[in Hz]

640 x 480 (VGA) 60; 75; 85

800 x 600 (SVGA) 56; 60; 72; 75; 85 32

1024 x 768 (XGA) 60; 70; 75; 85 32

Maximum



color depth

[bits]

1152 x 864 60; 70; 75 32

1280 x 1024 (UXGA) 60; 70; 75; 85 16

1280 x 1024 (UXGA) 60

1600 x 1200 (UXGA) 60; 65

1680 x 1050 60

1920 x 1080

1920 x 1200

Table 3: Supported display settings

Only VESA-compliant graphics modes are supported.

iRMC

Prerequisites

Supported text mode

The iRMC supports the following common text modes:

– 40 x 25

– 80 x 25

– 80 x 43

– 80 x 50

Refer to the Help system for your operating system for information on the display settings.

Keyboard settings

If the keyboard language settings on the remote workstation are different from those on the managed server, AVR keyboard language settings have to be same as on the managed server.

Mapping is possible between the following languages:

–

Auto Detect

(default value)

–

English (United States)

–

English (United Kingdom)

–

French

–

French (Belgium)

–

German (Germany)

–

German (Switzerland)

–

Japanese

–

Spanish

–

Italian

–

Danish

–

Finnish

–

Norwegian (Norway)

–

Portuguese (Portugal)

–

Swedish

–

Dutch (Netherland)

–

Dutch (Belgium)

–

Turkish - F

–

Turkish - Q

Not all keys can be mapped. If one key doesn’t work, please use the

Softkeyboard (see

page 88

iRMC S4

Using AVR

5.2 Using AVR via a Java Applet

You have the following options to start AVR:

Ê Click the Start Video Redirection (Java Web Start) button on the Advanced Video

Redirection (AVR)

page of the iRMC web interface (see

page 324

) or, if displayed,

Ê Click the Video Redirection (JWS) link in the tree structure of the iRMC web interface.

The Advanced Video Redirection window (AVR window) opens, showing you the display on the managed server.

5.2.1 AVR window

Menu bar Tool bar AVR view Special keys

Figure 24: Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) window

iRMC

Using AVR

●

The AVR window also contains the following elements:

AVR menu bar provides access to the individual AVR menus (see

page 90 ).

The AVR tool bar provides direct access to a variety of AVR tools allowing you, among others, to stop/resume your AVR session, use the Virtual Media

function, record your AVS session and use hotkeys (see page 87 ).

●

The zoom tool bar allows you to stageless enlarge or reduce the AVR view

(see page 106 ).

The integrated special keys in right bottom of the AVR window allow you to use Windows keys or special key combinations which are not sent by AVR if

you press them on your own keyboard (see page 87 ).

5.2.2 Using a low bandwidth

In the case of a reduced data transfer rate, you can configure a lower bandwidth

(bits per pixel, bpp) in terms of color depth for your current AVR session.

5.2.3 Parallel AVR sessions

AVR can be used by up to two user sessions simultaneously. The AVR session started first is initially in Full access mode and has full control over the server.

Starting a second AVR session while a previous one is still active

When an AVR session2 is started while a previous AVR session1 is still active and in Full access mode, the procedure is as described below.

– In the AVR window of session 1, the Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box opens which counts down from 30 seconds:

Figure 25: Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box - Give Permission to ...

iRMC S4

Using AVR

Allow Virtual Console

Session 2 is switched to Full access mode. Session 1 is switched

Partial access (only Video)

mode.

Virtual media connections of session1 are cleared.

Allow only Video

Session 2 is switched to Partial access (only Video) mode. In this mode, you can only passively observe keyboard and mouse operation of the server. Only the Video and Active Users functions can be used.

Session 1 remains in Full access mode.

Deny Access

Session 2 is denied access and closed. Session1 remains in Full

access

mode.

If the counter expires before session 1 has confirmed with OK, session 2 is switched to Full access mode. Session1 is switched to

Partial access (only Video)

mode.

Requesting "Full access" when two AVR sessions are currently active

If two AVR sessions are currently active and session 1 is the one that is not in

Full access

mode, user 1 of session 1 can request Full access by clicking Request

Full Permission

in the Options menu of the AVR window (see

page 101

In this case, user 2 of the concurrent AVR session 2 is prompted to grant AVR session 1 Full access:

Figure 26: Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box - Give Permission to user <user>...

This dialog box, which counts down from 28 seconds, offers for selection the following options, which can be enabled by clicking OK:

iRMC

Using AVR

Allow Virtual Console

AVR session 1 is granted Full access. In AVR session 1, this is indicated as follows:

Figure 27: INFORMATION dialog box - "Full access" granted

Allow only Video

AVR session 1remains in partial Partial access mode (default). In AVR session 1, this is indicated as follows:

Figure 28: INFORMATION dialog box - "Partial access" granted

Exiting the "Full access" session

If two AVR sessions are currently active and you exit the one that is in Full access mode, the following dialog box opens, asking you to select the next master session (i.e. the session with Full access).

Figure 29: Virtual Console Sharing Privileges dialog box - Select the next Master Session iRMC S4

Using AVR

This dialog box, which counts down from 10 seconds, offers for selection the user of the other session:

– If you select this option, the other session will switch to Full access mode.

– If you deselect this option, the other session will remain in Partial access (only

Video)

mode.

– If the counter expires before you have confirmed with OK, the other session will remain in Partial access (only Video) mode.

5.2.4 "Local Monitor Off Control" function

The Local Monitor Off Control function of the iRMC allows you to power down the local monitor of the managed server for the duration of your AVR session. In this way, you ensure that the inputs you make and the actions you perform on the local monitor on the server using AVR cannot be seen. The identification LED flashes to indicate "Local Monitor Off" mode on the server.

You configure the Local Monitor Off Control function on the Advanced Video

Redirection

page of the iRMC web interface (see page 324

). On the

Advanced Video Redirection

page, you can also configure that the local monitor is always switched off automatically whenever a new AVR session is started.

After you have configured the system appropriately, you can switch the local monitor of the server on and off from the remote workstation by alternatively using the AVR Video menu by clicking the second icon from the right in the tool bar.

The local monitor is always switched on and cannot be switched if the

Local Monitor Off Control

option (see

page 328

) is disabled.

The current status of the local monitor is indicated the AVR Video menu and

displayed via the second icon from the right in the AVR Tool bar (see section

"AVR Tool bar" on page 106 ):

Indicates that the local monitor is locked (switched off), i.e. actions performed on the AVR console cannot be seen on the monitor of the managed server. Clicking this button will unlock the monitor of the managed server and change icon color to green.

iRMC

Using AVR

Indicates that the monitor of the managed server is unlocked (switched on), i.e. actions performed on the AVR console can be seen on the monitor of the

 managed server. Clicking this button will lock the monitor of the managed server and change icon color to read.



If the Local Monitor Off Control option (see page 328

) is disabled, the monitor status cannot be switched.

5.2.5 Redirecting the keyboard

Keyboard redirection only works when the focus is on the AVR window.

If keyboard redirection appears not to be working, simply click on the AVR window.

Ê If the keyboard does not respond, check that the AVR window is not in view-

only mode. How to switch to full-control mode is described on page 84

Special key combinations

AVR passes all normal key combinations to the server. Special keys such as

Windows keys are not sent. Some special key combinations such as [ALT] +

[F4] cannot be sent, because they are interrupted by the client’s operating system. In such cases, you should use the integrated special keys or the hotkeys defined by yourself or the virtual keyboard.

Full keyboard support

The Full keyboard support feature allows you to use, via SoftKeyboard, all function keys of the managed server’s physical keyboard.

Integrated special keys

In the lower right of the AVR window, you will find a bar containing the special keys. These keys are implemented as “sticky keys”, i.e. they remain pressed

(indicated by a red label) when you click them and only return to their normal position when you click them again.

Using the integrated special keys, you can, for instance, use special key combinations which are not sent by AVR if you press them on your own keyboard. iRMC S4

Using AVR

Figure 30: AVR window - integrated special keys

[LALT]

Left Alt(ernate) key (corresponds to the [Alt] key on your keyboard).

[LCTRL]

Left CTRL key (corresponds to the left [Ctrl] key on your keyboard).

[RAlt]

Right Alt(ernate) key / Alt(ernate) Graphic key (corresponds to the

[Alt Gr] key on your keyboard).

[RCTRL]

Right CTRL key (corresponds to the right [Ctrl] key on your keyboard).

[Num]

Num Key. Activates/deactivates the numeric keys on the right of your keyboard (corresponds to the [Num] key on your keyboard).

[Caps]

Caps Lock key (corresponds to the [Caps Lock] key on your keyboard).

[Scroll]

Scroll key (corresponds to the [Scroll ] key on your keyboard).

SoftKeyboard (virtual keyboard)

The SoftKeyboard (also known as virtual keyboard, see

figure 31 ) provides you

with a functional representation of the keyboard. All key combinations are available when you use the SoftKeyboard. This means that you can use the

SoftKeyboard as a fully functional replacement for a real keyboard.

You activate the SoftKeyboard in the AVR window from the Keyboard menu (see

page 91

iRMC

Using AVR

Figure 31: SoftKeyboard (keyboard layout: English (US))

Secure Keyboard

If you are connected to the iRMC web interface over an HTTP connection, your keystrokes and mouse clicks can be configured to be encrypted in real time

before transferred to the managed server (see section "AVR window - Options menu" on page 100 ).

5.2.6 Redirecting the mouse

The mouse pointer on the managed server is moved synchronously with the mouse on the remote workstation. You configure the mouse redirection settings in the AVR window under Mouse Mode in the Mouse menu (see

page 99 ).

The settings for the mouse pointer synchronization are supported only for the operating system which runs the managed server.

If the software which controls the mouse is active, sometimes the mouse pointer cannot be synchronized.

iRMC S4

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

5.2.7 Menus and toolbar of the AVR window

The menu bar of the AVR window contains the following menus:

– The Video menu allows you to configure the AVR settings and to control the

AVR (see

page 91

– The Keyboard menu allows you to enable a SoftKeyBoard and select the

Keyboard language. Beyond that, the Keyboard menu allows you to handle special keys when redirecting the keyboards (see

page 94

– The Mouse menu allows you to configure your mouse settings (see

page 99

– The Options menu allows you to enable/disable keyboard encryption, resize window size to fit your needs, and set the language

(German/English/Japanese) in which the menus and dialog boxes of the

AVR window are to be shown (see page 100 ). Additionally, the Options menu

allows you to request full permission (Full access mode) if your AVR session is the one of two currently active AVR sessions which runs in Restricted access mode.

– The Media menu allows you to use the Virtual Media function (see

page 102

– The Power Control menu allows you to power the managed server on and off, and to configure the behavior of the server during the next boot operation

(see

page 102

– The Active Users menu displays the currently active AVR sessions (see

page 105

– The Help menu allows you to display information on the version of the currently running KVM Remote Console Utility as well as information on the managed server (see

page 105 ).

The icons of the AVR toolbar provide direct access to frequently used AVR functions.

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

5.2.7.1

Video menu

The Video menu allows you to configure the AVR settings and to control the

AVR.

Figure 32: AVR window - Video menu

You can select the following functions in the Video menu:

Pause Redirection

Pauses AVR and freezes the AVR view. The AVR view remains frozen until AVR is resumed.

Resume Redirection

Resumes AVR and refreshes the AVR view.

Refresh Video

Refreshes the AVR view.

Turn ON Host Display

Switches on the local monitor of the managed server depending on whether this option is selected/deselected.

This function is disabled in the following cases, even if the local monitor is switched off:

– you are in view-only mode,

– A high-resolution graphics mode is set on the managed server

(see table 3 on page 80 ).



Local monitor <status> display: Local Monitor always off iRMC S4

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Turn OFF Host Display

Switches off the local monitor of the managed server depending on whether this option is selected/deselected.

If you are in view-only mode, this function is disabled, even if the local monitor is switched off.

Low Bandwidth Mode

In the case of a reduced data transfer rate, you can configure here a lower bandwidth (bits per pixel, bpp) in terms of color depth for your all

AVR sessions at the same iRMC.

Normal

Default.



No lower bandwidth.

8 bpp

8 bpp color depth (256 colors).

8 bpp B&W

8 bpp black&white depth (256 levels of gray).

16 bpp

16 bpp color depth (65 536 colors).

Capture Screen

Makes a screenshot of the AVR view and opens a file browser that allows you to store the related CapturedScreen.jpeg file in any directory of your work station or on a network share.

The same functionality is also available via the Advanced Video

Redirection

page of the iRMC Web interface (see

"Creating an

ASR screenshot" on page 325 ).

Full Screen

Enables/disables Fullscreen mode.

This option is only enabled if screen resolution on the remote workstation equals screen resolution on the managed server.

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Start Video

Creates a video recording the events that are displayed on the monitor at the managed server.

This button is disabled in the following cases:

– You have not yet configured the video settings under the

Settings

option (see below).

– A video recording is currently running.

Stop Video

Stops video recording. This option is only enabled when a video recording session is currently running.

Settings

Opens the Video Record dialog box, allowing you to configure the settings required for recording a video.

Figure 33: Video record settings

Video Length

Duration of the video (in seconds).

Browse

Opens a browser dialog allowing you to navigate to a directory on your computer or on a network share where the video should be stored.

Video to be Saved

Shows the directory you have selected via Browse.

iRMC S4

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Normalized video resolution to 1024x768

In this case, a separate video file will be created for each resolution change on the monitor of the managed server.

If this option is enabled, a normalized video resolution of

1024x768 is applied to the overall video output, regardless of the actual video resolution on the monitor of the managed server. This may reduce video quality.

Activates your settings and closes the dialog box. The Start Video button is now enabled.

Cancel

Closes the dialog box without activating your settings.

Exit

Terminates your own AVR session.

5.2.7.2

AVR window - Keyboard menu

The Keyboard menu allows you to handle special keys when redirecting the

keyboard (see section "Redirecting the keyboard" on page 87

Figure 34: AVR window -Keyboard menu

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

You can select the following functions in the Keyboard menu:

Hold Right Ctrl Key

Holds right [Ctrl] key pressed.

Hold Right Alt Key

Holds right [Alt] key pressed.

Hold Left Ctrl Key

Holds left [Ctrl] key pressed.

Hold Left Alt key

Holds left [Alt] key pressed.

Left Windows Key

Holds down left Windows key if Hold Down is enabled. Otherwise, Press

and Release

is applied.

Right Windows Key

Holds down right Windows key if Hold Down is enabled. Otherwise, Press

and Release

is applied.

Ctrl+Alt+Del

Applies the key combination [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Del].

Context Menu

Opens the appropriate context menu of the application or the operating system running on the managed server.

Hot Keys

Allows you to define and apply your own hotkeys.

To apply an already defined hotkey, proceed as follows:

1. Click Hot Keys.

To define hotkeys you can also use the hotkey icon in the AVR

Tool bar (see

section "AVR Tool bar" on page 106 ).

2. In the list of the already defined hotkeys, which is displayed below the

Add Hot Key

item, click the desired hotkey.

To define a new hotkey, proceed as follows:

1. Click Hot Keys – Add Hot Key.

The User Defined Macros dialog box opens, which displays the already defined user defined macros (here: A, B): iRMC S4

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Figure 35: AVR window - Keyboard menu - Add Hot Key - User Defined Macros (1)

2. Click Add to define a new user defined macro.

The Add Macro dialog box opens:

N+E+W

Figure 36: AVR window - Keyboard menu - Add Hot Key - Add Macro

3. Enter your favored combination of up to six keys by using the

Windows

, Tab, Alt+F4, and Print Screen buttons and/or the keys of your keyboard.

The entered combination is displayed in the Add Macro dialog box.

Clicking on Clear All or Clear, you can remove all keys or the rightmost key from the display by clicking on Clear All or Clear, respectively.

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

4. Click OK to activate the new hotkey.

The new hot key is now displayed in the User Defined Macros dialog box:

N+E+W

Figure 37: AVR window - Keyboard menu - Add Hot Key - User Defined Macros (2)

5. To remove a hotkey, select the corresponding entry ("B" in the

example shown in figure 37 on page 97 ) and click Delete.

6. Click Close to close the User Defined Macros dialog box

Host Physical Keyboard

Language used on the keyboard of the managed server.

The following options are available:

–

Auto Detect

(default value)

–

English (United States)

–

English (United Kingdom)

–

French

–

French (Belgium)

–

German (Germany)

–

German (Switzerland)

–

Japanese

–

Spanish

–

Italian

–

Danish

–

Finnish

–

Norwegian (Norway)

iRMC S4

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

–

Portuguese (Portugal)

–

Swedish

–

Dutch (Netherland)

–

Dutch (Belgium)

–

Turkish - F

–

Turkish - Q

If you select AutoDetect, the AVR assumes that keyboard language is the same on the managed Server and the remote workstation.

SoftKeyboard

Displays the SoftKeyboard (virtual keyboard).

To display the SoftKeyboard in your preferred language, proceed as follows:

1. Move the mouse pointer on SoftKeyboard item.

A list of the available SoftKeyboard languages is shown.

2. Select your preferred language from the list.

The SoftKeyboard is displayed for the selected language:

Figure 38: AVR window - Keyboard menu - SoftKeyboard

Full Keyboard Support

If enabled, allows you to use, via SoftKeyboard, all function keys of the managed server’s physical keyboard.

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

5.2.7.3

AVR window - Mouse menu

The Mouse menu allows you to configure the settings for redirecting the mouse.

Figure 39: AVR window - Mouse menu

You can select the following functions in the Mouse menu:

Show mouse cursor

Displays/hides the mouse pointer of your remote workstation when using the AVR.

Mouse Calibration

Used for calibrating the relative mouse mode. This option is only enabled if Mouse Mode - Relative Mouse Mode has been selected.

In relative mouse mode, the mouse pointer of the managed server follows the mouse pointer of the remote workstation in a decelerated manner.

Show Host Cursor

Shows an additional mouse pointer additional to the mouse pointer of the managed server.

If hardware acceleration of the mouse pointer is set to the maximal value and the Matrox G200e driver is installed, the hardware mouse pointer of the iRMC is activated. Only one mouse pointer is normally displayed in this mode. In this case, the Show Host Cursor option can be used to display a second mouse pointer which refers to the managed server. iRMC S4

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Mouse Mode

Specifies the mouse mode (Absolute mouse mode, Relative mouse

mode

, or Hide mouse mode). In Hide mouse mode, the mouse pointer of the remote workstation is not displayed.

Default setting: Absolute mouse mode.

Please do always use the Absolute mouse mode. Only in case of an older operating system (e.g. RedHat 4) the

Absolute mouse mode

might not work.

For the LSI WEBBIOS, the Hide mouse mode (Relative) must be used.

5.2.7.4

AVR window - Options menu

The Options menu allows you to enable/disable keyboard/mouse encryption, resize window size to fit your needs, and set the language in which the menus and dialog boxes of the AVR window are to be shown.

Figure 40: AVR window - Options menu

You can select the following functions in the Options menu:

Keyboard/Mouse Encryption

Enables/disables keyboard/mouse encryption i.e. your keystrokes and mouse clicks will be encrypted in real time before being transferred to the managed server.

This option is not offered for selection if you are connected to the iRMC web interface over an HTTPS connection. In this case, all communication between the iRMC web interface and managed server is SSL encrypted.

100

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Window Size

Specifies whether the size of the AVR window is to be shown in its actual size or adapted to the resolution of local monitor of the managed server or to the monitor resolution on the remote workstation.

Actual Size

AVR window is expanded to full monitor size.

Fit to Client Resolution

This option is only enabled if screen resolution on the remote workstation is lower than or equal to screen resolution on the managed server.

If screen resolution on the remote workstation and on the managed server are identical, the Full Screen Icon in the

AVR Tool bar is enabled (see

section "AVR Tool bar" on page 106

Fit to Client Resolution

If screen resolution on the remote workstation is higher than screen resolution on the managed server, the AVR window is automatically adjusted.

This is the normal working environment.

GUI Languages

Specifies the language in which the menus and dialog boxes of the AVR window are to be shown (German, English, Japanese).

The selection preset with the GUI language that configured for the iRMC web interface from which the AVR session was started.

Prompts the user of the concurrent AVR session to grant you Full access.

Depending on this user’s decision, you will be granted Full access or remain in Partial access mode.

Request Full Permission

This option is only offered for selection if two AVR sessions are currently active and your session is the one that is not in Full

access

mode. iRMC S4

101

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Prompts the user of the concurrent AVR session to grant you Full access.

Depending on this user’s decision, you will be granted Full access or

remain in Partial access mode. For details, see "Requesting "Full access" when two AVR sessions are currently active" on page 84 .

5.2.7.5

AVR window - Media menu

Via the Media you can start the Virtual Media wizard. The Virtual Media wizard allows you to attach or detach media on the remote workstation as virtual media

devices (see chapter "Virtual Media Wizard" on page 111 )

Figure 41: AVR window - Media menu

Virtual Media Wizard...

Click Virtual Media Wizard... to start the Virtual Media wizard allowing you to attach or detach media on the remote workstation as virtual media devices (see

chapter "Virtual Media Wizard" on page 111

5.2.7.6

AVR window - Power Control menu

The Power Control menu allows you to power the server up/down or to reboot the server. Beyond that, you can configure the behavior of the server during the next boot operation.

102

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Figure 42: AVR window - Power Control menu

Power On

Switches the server on.

Immediate Power Off

Powers the server down, regardless of the status of the operating system.

Power Cycle

Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a configured period. You can configure this time in the Power Cycle Delay field of the ASR&R Options group (see

page 246

Press Power Button

Depending on the operating system installed and the action configured, you can trigger various actions by briefly pressing the power-off button.

These actions could be shutting down the computer or switching it to standby mode.

Immediate Reset

Completely restarts the server (cold start), regardless of the status of the operating system.

Pulse NMI

Initiates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). A NMI is a processor interrupt that cannot be ignored by standard interrupt masking techniques in the system.

iRMC S4

103

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Graceful Reset (Reboot)

Graceful shutdown and reboot.



This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as “Connected”.

Graceful Power Off (Shutdown)

Graceful shutdown and power off.



This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as “Connected”.

Set Boot Options

Clicking this item opens the Set Boot Options dialog box which allows you to configure the behavior of the system the next time it is booted.

104

Figure 43: Power Options menu - Set Boot Options

Boot Device Selector

Storage medium you wish to boot from. The following options are available:

–

No Change

: The system is booted from the same storage medium as previously.

–

PXE/iSCSI

: The system is booted from PXE/iSCSI over the network.

–

Hard Drive

: The system is booted from hard disk.

–

CDROM/DVD

: The system is booted from CD /DVD.

–

Floppy

: The system is booted from floppy disk.

–

Bios Setup

: The system enters BIOS setup when booting.

Boot Type

Determines the boot mode in which the system will be started at the next boot.

Depending on the server operating system, the following options are available for selection:

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

PC compatible (legacy)

The system is booted in legacy BIOS-compatibility mode.

Extensible Firmware Interface Boot (EFI)

The system is booted in UEFI boot mode (only on 64-bit operating systems).

Next Boot Only

The configured settings apply to the next boot only.

5.2.7.7

AVR window - Active Users menu

The Active Users menu shows the users currently using the AVR. The green bullet indicates your own session.

Figure 44: AVR window - Active Users menu

5.2.7.8

AVR window - Help menu

Beyond showing general information on JViewer, the Help menu displays in the

Server Information

dialog box the information defined under System Information in the System Overview page of iRMC web interface (see

section "System Overview

- General information on the server" on page 134

iRMC S4

105

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Figure 45: AVR window - Help menu

5.2.7.9

AVR Tool bar

The icons of the AVR toolbar provide direct access to frequently used AVR functions. When moving your mouse pointer on an icon, you often receive assistance in the form of tool tips.

In Partial access (only Video) mode only the Video and Active Users icons can be used.

Figure 46: AVR window - Preferences menu

106

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

If Video Redirection is executed in the Num Lock On mode on the server side, the client side also turns to Num Lock ON.

The following list shows the icons in the ServerList window and their meanings:

Resumes AVR and refreshes the AVR view.

Pauses AVR and freezes the AVR view. The AVR view remains frozen until AVR is resumed.

Enables/disables fullscreen mode.

Indicates whether (green) or not (red) a hard disk/USB redirection is established for this AVR session. Clicking the icon starts the Virtual

Media

wizard (see

chapter "Virtual Media Wizard" on page 111

Indicates whether (green) or not (red) a floppy redirection is established for this AVR session. Clicking the icon starts the Virtual

Media

wizard (see

chapter "Virtual Media Wizard" on page 111

Indicates whether (green) or not (red) a CD/DVD redirection is established for this AVR session. Clicking the icon starts the Virtual

Media

wizard (see

chapter "Virtual Media Wizard" on page 111

Indicates whether (green) or not (grayed out) the mouse pointer of the remote workstation is visible in the AVR window. Clicking the icon allows you to switch between the two modes.

Displays the SoftKeyboard (see

section "AVR window - Keyboard menu" on page 94

for details).

Depending on whether video settings have already been configured:

Starts video recording or opens the Video Record dialog box for configuring video settings (see

section "Video menu" on page 91

for details).

Displays the list of available hotkeys To apply a hotkey, click the related item. See

section "AVR window - Keyboard menu" on page 94

for details on defining hotkeys.

The zoom tool bar allows you to stageless enlarge or reduce the AVR view.

Table 4: Icons in the ServerList windows iRMC S4

107

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Displays for each currently active AVR session the iRMC user who has started the AVR session and the IP address of the remote workstation from which the AVR session was started.

If Local Monitor Off Control has been enabled in the AVR page of the

 iRMC web interface, this toggle button allows you to switch between the following states:



Indicates that the monitor of the managed server is unlocked, i.e. actions performed on the AVR console can be seen on the monitor of

 the managed server. Clicking this button will lock the monitor of the managed server.



Indicates that the monitor of the managed server is locked, i.e. actions performed on the AVR console cannot be seen on the monitor

 of the managed server. Clicking this button will unlock the monitor of the managed server.



This toggle button allows you to power the managed server on and off:



Indicates that the managed server is currently powered on. Clicking

 this button starts a confirmation dialog for powering the managed server off (immediate power off).



Indicates that the managed server is currently powered off. Clicking this button starts a confirmation dialog for powering the managed server on.

Table 4: Icons in the ServerList windows

108

iRMC

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

5.3 Using AVR via HTML5

You have the following options to start AVR:

Ê Click the Start Video Redirection (HTML5) button on the Advanced Video

Redirection (AVR)

page of the iRMC web interface (see

page 324 )

or, if displayed,

Ê Click the Video Redirection (HTML5) link in the tree structure of the iRMC web interface.

The default browser opens, showing you the display on the managed server.

Figure 47: Default Browser displaying AVR redirection using HTML5

The HTML5 page is divided into several groups:

KVM settings

In this group you can handle the redirection via HTML5.

Server IP

IP address of the server the iRMC resides on.

iRMC S4

109

Menu bar and tool bar of the AVR window

Keyboard Layout

Defines, how the keystrokes on the physical keyboard are interpreted.

You have two options:

– English (US)

– German

Stop KVM

Stops the video redirection.

Ctrl&Alt&Del

Executes Ctrl&Alt&Del on the server.

Record Video

Records the redirected session.

Media Redirection

In this group you can to attach or detach media on the remote workstation as virtual media devices.?

CD Image

Displays the selected ISO image.

Browse

Opens a dialog to navigate to the directory of the storage medium that you want to make available as virtual medium from your remote workstation.

Start Media Redirection

Starts media redirection and connects the provided storage medium as

Virtual Media.

Supported Browsers

The HTML5 redirection function is supported by the following browsers:

– Microsoft Internet Explorer as of version 11

– Modzilla Firefox as of version 32

110

iRMC

6 Virtual Media Wizard

A valid virtual media (VM) license key is required to use the Virtual Media

Wizard.

The Virtual Media Wizard makes available to the managed server a “virtual” drive the source of which you provide on a remote workstation. The virtual media connection between the managed server and the remote workstation is established using the AVR Java applet. Depending on the settings made in the

Virtual Media Options

page, you can connect up to 12 virtual media in total and choose between the following types:

– Physical Floppies and/or Floppy Images (up to 4)

– Physical CD/DVDs and/or CD/DVD ISO Images (up to 4 in total)

– HardDisk drives and/or HardDisk/USB images (up to 4 in total)

It is not necessary that the remote media are physically located on the remote workstation. They can also be located on any network share accessible from this remote workstation.

Figure 48: Virtual media provided via a remote connection iRMC S4

111

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

6.1 Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

If you provide the source for a virtual drive on the remote workstation then the virtual functionality supports the following device types:

– Floppy

– CD ISO image

– DVD ISO image

– CD, DVD

Optical storage media (CD, DVD) are automatically displayed (offered for selection).

Devices connected as virtual media are recognized as the USB connected devices by the iRMC. They cannot be used if no USB connection is available (e.g. no USB driver exists).

You can use the virtual drive to install an operating system on your PRIMERGY

server from the remote workstation (see chapter "Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC S4" on page 413

●

This section provides information on the following topics:

Starting the Virtual Media wizard

Handling virtual media via the Virtual Media dialog box

– Providing storage media for the Virtual Media session

– Connecting storage media as virtual media

– Clearing Virtual Media connections

112

iRMC

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

6.1.1 Starting Virtual Media wizard

You start the Virtual Media wizard by using the AVR Java applet (see section

"Advanced Video Redirection - Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" on page 324 ).

Start the iRMC web interface (see section "Logging into the iRMC web interface" on page 122 ).

Ê Open the Advanced Video Redirection page and click on the Start Video

Redirection (Java Web-Start)

to start Advanced Video Redirection (see section

"Advanced Video Redirection - Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" on page 324 ).

This opens the AVR window.

In the menu bar in the AVR window, choose:



Media - Virtual Media Wizard...

or click one of the three Virtual Media icons in the tool bar.

Figure 49: AVR window - Media - Virtual Media Wizard...

The Virtual Media dialog box opens. iRMC S4

113

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

6.1.2 Virtual Media dialog box

Depending on the settings made in the Virtual Media page of iRMC web interface, the Virtual Media dialog box displays from 0 up to 4 panels for each of the following three media types:

●

Floppy Key-Media (Floppy Images).



Default: No Floppy Key-Medium is displayed.

● CD/DVD Media ISO images.

– CD/DVD Media ISO images

– CD/DVD drives (i.e. physical CD/DVD)

●

Default: 2 CD/DVD Media ISO images are displayed.

Hard disk/USB Key Media

– Hard disk/USB Key images

– Physical drive (fixed drive)

Default: 1 Hard disk/USB Key Medium is displayed.

Physical storage devices must be mounted on Linux systems.



114

iRMC

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

Figure 50: Virtual Media dialog box

The Status panel informs on both the storage media which are currently available for virtual media connections and the storage media which are currently connected as virtual storage media. iRMC S4

115

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

6.1.3 Provision of storage media for virtual media

At any time during your AVR session, you can the following options:

– Adding additional virtual media connections to your already existing ones.

– Disconnect individual virtual media connections.

For providing a storage medium of the favored type (e.g. a DVD Image), proceed as follows:

Physical drives are automatically displayed. Browsing is only required for providing images.

Ê In the appropriate panel of the Vitual Media dialog box, click Browse.

The Open file browser dialog box opens.

In the Open dialog box, navigate to the directory of the storage medium that you want to make available as virtual medium from your remote workstation.

Figure 51: Open dialog box (Windows)

Select the required device type under Files of Type.

Physical storage devices must be mounted on Linux systems.



116

iRMC

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

Ê Specify the storage medium you wish to connect as a virtual medium under

File Name

– In the case of an ISO image (ISO/NRG image), enter the file name.

Alternatively, click on the file name in the Explorer.

– In the case of a drive, enter the name of the drive, e.g.

– “D” for drive D (Windows)

–

/dev/...

(Linux)

Click Open to confirm your selection.

The selected storage medium is made available as a virtual medium and displayed in the corresponding panel of the Virtual Media dialog box.

Display in the “Storage Devices” dialog (Windows)

Figure 52: Virtual Media dialog box: The provided storage medium is displayed.

Ê Click the corresponding Connect... button to connect the provided storage medium as Virtual Media.

The selected storage medium is made available as a virtual medium and displayed in the corresponding panel of the Virtual Media dialog box.

iRMC S4

117

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

Display in the “Storage Devices” dialog (Windows)

Figure 53: Virtual Media dialog box: The provided storage medium is displayed.

118

iRMC

Provision of virtual media at the remote workstation

6.1.4 Clearing Virtual Media connections

A Virtual connection is automatically released in the following cases:

– The AVR session is disconnected.

– The AVR session which established the virtual media connection changes into "read-only" mode due to a successful "Full Access" request of a second AVR session.

– The settings configured in the Virtual Media Options page are changed

(see

page 333

Open the Virtual Media dialog (see

section "Starting Virtual Media wizard" on page 113 ).

Ê “Safely remove” the storage device, i.e. ensure that no more applications/programs are accessing the storage media.

Ê To clear a

Virtual Media

connection, click the corresponding Disconnect button.

iRMC S4

119

7 iRMC web interface

The iRMC not only has its own operating system, but also acts as a web server, providing its own interface. You can choose whether to show the menus and dialog boxes of the iRMC web interface in German, English or Japanese.

When you enter values in the web interface, you often receive assistance in the form of tool tips.

Third Party Licenses can be seen by clicking the Third Party Licenses link

in the navigation bar of the web interface (see page 130

iRMC S4

121

Logging into the iRMC web interface

7.1 Logging into the iRMC web interface

Ê Open a web browser on the remote workstation and enter the (configured)

DNS name (see page 264 ) or IP address of the iRMC.

Different login screens appear depending on whether LDAP access to a directory service has been configured for the iRMC (LDAP Enabled option, see

page 295

If no login screen appears, check the LAN connection (see

section

"Testing the LAN interface" on page 47

– LDAP access to the directory service is not configured for the iRMC

(LDAP Enabled option is not activated) and Always use SSL Login option

(see

page 295

) is not activated:

122

Figure 54: Login screen for the iRMC web interface (LDAP access not configured and the “Always use SSL login” option is not selected)

Type in the data for the default administrator account.

User name

: admin

Password

: admin

Both the User name and the Password are case-sensitive.

"User “<name>” Configuration

- User configuration (details)" on page 283 ).

Click OK to confirm your entries.

iRMC

Logging into the iRMC web interface

– LDAP access to the directory service is configured for the iRMC



(LDAP Enabled option is activated) or Always use SSL Login option is activated):

Figure 55: Login screen for the iRMC web interface (LDAP access configured)

The user name and password are always SSL-protected when they are transmitted. If you activate the Secure (SSL) option, all communication between the web browser and the iRMC is carried out over HTTPS.

Ê Type in the data for the default administrator account.

User name

: admin

Password

: admin

For reasons of security, it is recommended that you create a new administrator account once you have logged in, and then delete the default administrator account or at least change the

password for the account (see "User “<name>” Configuration

- User configuration (details)" on page 283

Ê Click Login to confirm your entries.

The web interface opens showing the System Information page (see

page 133 ).

iRMC S4

123

Required user permissions

7.2 Required user permissions

The following

table 5

provides an overview of the permissions which are required in order to use the individual functions available at the iRMC web interface.

Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required iRMC -specific permission

Open the System Overview page.

Switch identification LED on/off.

Set Asset Tag Configuration.

Edit Operating System Informations.

Open the System Components page.

System Information

X X X X

Reset Memory Error Counter.

View SPD Data

Open/edit the AIS Connect page.

Open/edit the SystemReport page.

X X X X

X X

Open the Network Inventory page.

Open/edit the Driver Monitorpage.

RAID Information

Open the RAID Controller page.

Open the Physical Discs page.

Identify RAID physical disk (Locate button).

View Physical Drives page.

X X

Table 5: Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface

124

iRMC

Functions in the iRMC web interface

Required user permissions

Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required iRMC -specific permission

BIOS

Open the Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter

Settings

page.

Edit Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Param. Settings

Open the BIOS Update Settings page.

Perform BIOS update

iRMC

Open the iRMC S4 Information page.

Reboot iRMC S4

Load license key onto the iRMC.

Set Miscellaneous Options.

Open the Save iRMC S4 Time page.

Change iRMC Time Options.

Open the Save iRMC S4 FW Settings page.

Select Include User Settings.

Select all other Settings.

Import iRMC settings in WinSCU XML format.

Open/edit the Certificate Upload page.

Open/edit the Generate a self-signed RSA Cert. page.

Open iRMC S4 Firmware Update page.

Set firmware selector.

Perform Firmware Update from File.

Update firmware via TFTP (iRMC S4 TFTP Settings).

X X

X X X X

X X

X X X X

X X

Table 5: Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface

X X

X iRMC S4

125

Required user permissions

Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required iRMC -specific permission

Open Power On/Off page.

Modify Boot Options.

Power Management

X X X X

Use Power Control.

Open/edit the Power Options page.

Open Power Supply Info page.

X X X

Power Consumption

Open/edit Power Consumption Configuration page.

Open Current Power Consumption page.

Open/edit Power Consumption History page.

Sensors

X X X X

Open Fans page.

Start fan test (Fan Test group).

X X X X

Set Fan Check Time (Fan Test group).

Select individual Fans (System Fans group).

Set Fan Fail Action / Delay Time.

Open Temperature page.

Define action on critical temperature.

Open Voltages page.

Open Power Supply page.

Configure power supply redundancy.

Open Component Status page.

Event Log

Table 5: Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface

126

iRMC

Functions in the iRMC web interface

Required user permissions

Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required iRMC -specific permission

Open System Event Log Content page.

Clear the system event log (SEL).

Save event log

(SEL).

Define the severity for the display of SEL entries.

Open Internal Event Log Content page.

Clear the internal event log (iEL).

X X X X

X X X

X X X X

X X

Save event log (iEL)

Define the severity for the display of SEL entries.

Open Event Log Configuration page.

Modify Default Web Interface display filtering.

Change SEL Mode.

Change Helpdesk Information.

Server Management

X X

X X X X

Open/edit Server Management Info. page.

Network Settings

Open/edit the Network Interface page.

Open/edit the Ports and Netw. Services page.

Open/edit DNS Configuration page.

Open/edit SNMP Configuration page

Table 5: Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface

X iRMC S4

127

Required user permissions

Functions in the iRMC web interface Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required iRMC -specific permission

Alerting

Open/edit SNMP TRAP Alerting page.

Open/edit the Email Alerting page.

User Management

Open/edit the iRMC S4 User page.

Open/edit the Directory Service Config. page.

Open CAS Configuration page.

Edit CAS Generic Configuration.

Edit CAS User Privilege and Permissions

Console Redirection

Open the BIOS Text Console page.

Modify the BIOS Console Redirection Options.

Start Text Console Redirection.

X X X X

Open/edit the Advanced Video Redirection page.

Virtual Media

Open/edit the Virtual Media page.

Open/edit the Remote Image Mount page.

Open/edit the Media Options page.

Lifecycle Management

Open/edit the Update Settings page.

X X

Open/edit the Online Update page.

X X

Open/edit the Offline Update page.

Open/edit the Custom Image page.

Table 5: Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface

X X

128

iRMC

Functions in the iRMC web interface

Required user permissions

Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required iRMC -specific permission

Open/edit the PrimeCollect page.



Action is only possible if no agents are running.

Feature is not available on all systems.

Table 5: Permissions to use special the iRMC web interface

X X iRMC S4

129

Structure of the user interface

7.3 Structure of the user interface

The iRMC web interface is structured as follows:

Selected function Interface language selector Title bar

Logout button

Navigation area Working area

"Third Party Licenses Information" link

Figure 56: Structure of the iRMC web interface

130

iRMC

Structure of the user interface

Choosing the language for the iRMC web interface

On the right of the black bar above the work area, you will find a flag icon. Click this icon to choose the language (German / English / Japanese) used to display the navigation area, menus and dialog boxes of the web interface.

Navigation area

The navigation area contains the menu tree structure whose nodes combine the links to the individual iRMC functions arranged on a task basis. When you click one of these links, the link is enabled and the work area for that function is displayed showing any output, dialog boxes, options, links and buttons.

Below the links to the individual iRMC functions, you will find the links Logout and Refresh:

●

Logout

allows you to terminate the iRMC session after you have confirmed this in a dialog box. Different login screens appear after the session has been closed depending on whether LDAP access to a directory service has

been configured for the iRMC (LDAP Enabled option, see page 295 ):

– If LDAP access to the directory service is not configured for the iRMC

(LDAP Enabled is not activated) and then Always use SSL login option (see

page 295

) is deactivated, the following login screen appears:

Figure 57: Login page (after logging out)

Click Login to open the login screen of the web interface (see

figure 54 on page 122 ). This allows you to log in again if you wish.

iRMC S4

131

Structure of the user interface

– If LDAP access to the directory service is configured for the iRMC (LDAP

Enabled

option is activated) or the Always use SSL login option (see

page 295 ) is deactivated, the appropriate login screen appears (see

figure 55 on page 123 ).

● Click Refresh to refresh the contents of the iRMC web interface.

Alternatively, you can configure the interface to automatically update

the contents periodically (see "Enable Auto Refresh" on page 260 ).

132

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

7.4 System Information - Information on the server

The System Information entry contains the links to the following pages:

–

"System Overview - General information on the server" on page 134

–

"System Component Information - Information on the server components" on page 139

–

"AIS Connect - Configuring and using AIS Connect" on page 142

–

"System Report" on page 147

–

"Network Inventory" on page 151

–

"Driver Monitor" on page 152

iRMC S4

133

System Information - Information on the server

7.4.1 System Overview -



General information on the server

The System Overview page provides information on

– the system status,

– asset tag configuration

– system (general information)

– the operating system of the managed server,

– system FRUs (Field Replaceable Units) / IDPROM.

– current overall power consumption of the managed server

In addition, the System Overview page allows you to enter a customer-specific asset tag for the managed server.

Figure 58: System Overview page

134

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

System Status

The status of the global error LED, the CSS LED and the identification LED are shown under System Status. You can also switch the PRIMERGY identification

LED on and off.

Figure 59: System Overview page - System Status

Power LED

Power status of the server.



The following statuses are possible:

– On: “Power ON” (green)

– Off: “Power OFF” (orange)

Error LED

Informs about the server‘s Global Error LED:

Status Info



(iRMC)

off on blinking

Global Error LED



on the Server

does not light up.

lights red.

flashes red.

Overall system status

No critical event.

Prefailure event for a non CSS component.

Critical event.

CSS LED

Informs about the server’s CSS (Customer Self Service) LED:

Status Info



(iRMC)

off on blinking

CSS LED on the



Server

does not light up.

lights orange.

flashes orange.

Overall system status

The server is operational.

Prefailure event for a CSS component.

Defective CSS component.

iRMC S4

135

System Information - Information on the server

Identify LED

Server identifier.



The following statuses are possible:

– On (blue)

– Off (grey)

Turn On/Turn Off

Click Turn On / Turn Off to toggle the PRIMERGY identification

LED on and off.

Asset Tag Configuration

Under Asset Tag Configuration, you can enter a customer-specific asset tag for the managed server.

The customer-specific asset tag allows you to assign the server an inventory number or other identifier of your choice.

With Windows-based systems, this customer-specific asset tag is provided automatically by the WMI (Windows Management

Instrumentation). It can then be evaluated by in-house tools or used for integration in enterprise management systems (such as CA Unicenter).

Figure 60: System Overview page - Asset Tag Configuration

System Asset Tag

You can enter the asset tag here.

Click Apply to accept the asset tag.

136

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

System Information

System Information

lists information on the managed server.

Figure 61: System Overview page - System Information

Operating System Information

Operating System Information

lists information on the operating system of the managed server and whether the ServerView agents are available or the managed server ServerView Agentless Service are available on the managed server.

Figure 62: System Overview page - Operating System Information

If neither a ServerView agent nor the ServerView Agentless Service is running, you can edit all fields of the Operating System Information group, otherwise these fields are not editable.

If the ServerView agents are running, all values are set by the

ServerView agents. The values can be manually adjusted, but only inband.

If the ServerView Agentless Service is running, the values are set except the values for System Location and System Contact, which cannot be accessed by the ServerView Agentless Service. The values for System

Location

and System Contact can be set manually.

iRMC S4

137

System Information - Information on the server

System FRU / IDPROM Information

Information on the FRUs (Field Replaceable Units) is listed under

System FRU/IDPROM Information

. FRUs are system components that can be released and removed from the system. The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the CSS (Customer Self Service) functionality is supported.

Figure 63: System Overview page - System FRU / IDPROM Information

Current Overall Power Consumption

This option is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.

Figure 64: System Overview page - Current Overall Power Consumption

Under Current Overall Power Consumption you can see all the measurements current, minimum, maximum and average power consumption for the server in the current interval.

A graphical display also shows the current power consumption of the server compared with the maximum possible power consumption.

138

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

7.4.2 System Component Information -



Information on the server components

The System Component Information page provides information on the CPU and the main memory modules. The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the CSS (Customer Self Service) functionality is supported.

The following status icons indicate the possible statuses of the system components:

OK: Component status is okay.

Component slot is empty.

Warning: The status of the component has deteriorated.

Fault: The component has a fault.

Table 6: Status of the system component iRMC S4

139

System Information - Information on the server

Figure 65: System Component Information page

On PRIMERGY servers with support for TPM (Trusted Platform Module), this page indicates whether TPM is enabled or disabled.

System CPU Information

This group provides information on the status, IDs, CSS capability, performance etc. of the CPU(s) in the managed PRIMERGY server.

140

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

System Memory Information

This group provides information on the status, IDs, CSS capability and performance of the main memory modules in the managed PRIMERGY server.

Select

Here you can select individual memory modules to which the action you select under Please select memory action from list is to be applied.

Select all

Selects all memory modules.

Deselect all

Cancels your selection.

Please select memory action from list

This list, which is only displayed in case of an error, allows you to select an action to be applied to the selected memory modules.

The following actions are offered for selection:

Reset Error Counter

Resets the error counter.

In the case of an iRMC or ServerBlade, it is no longer necessary to explicitly reset the error counter because new modules are detected automatically with the error counter set to 0.

Enable Module

Enables the memory module.

Apply to the selected modules

Applies the selected action to the selected memory modules.

View SPD Data / No SPD Data

Clicking the toggle button View SPD Data / No SPD Data shows or hides vendor-specific details (Serial Presence Detect (SPD) data) for the individual memory components.

The SPD data for a memory component is stored in an EEPROM integrated in the component and serves to allow the BIOS to automatically detect this memory component (RAM, DIMM). iRMC S4

141

System Information - Information on the server

7.4.3 AIS Connect - Configuring and using AIS Connect

The AIS Connect page allows you to configure the embedded AIS Connect functionality of the iRMC.

AIS Connect (AutoImmuneSystems©) enables a PRIMERGY server to be remotely monitored and in some cases also be controlled by the Service

System of Fujitsu Technology Solutions where a service technician will control the further workflow.

AIS Connect functionality includes:

– Enabling the iRMC embedded AIS agent to send auto-calls to the Technical

Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions.

– Allowing the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions to retrieve

PrimeCollect archives from the iRMC.

– Allowing the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions to retrieve

System Report data from the iRMC.

– Allowing the Technical Support of Fujitsu Technology Solutions to connect to the iRMC web interface of the iRMC.

Sending PrimeCollect archives requires a valid eLCM license key (see

"License Key" on page 176

AIS Connect establishes a connection between the embedded AIS Connect client (AIS agent) running on the iRMC and the Service System of Fujitsu

Technology Solutions. This connection, which allows a technician to connect from remote to the iRMC even if the iRMC is not accessible directly via LAN, is used for transferring system information (PrimeCollect Archives, System

Reports etc.) in case of an error.

Embedded AIS Connect can work in two different modes:

–

Warranty Mode

In Warranty Mode, the only function of AIS Connect is to contact the

Enterprise Environment (Service System) on a daily basis and to send data created by Prime Collect only on the user’s demand.

–

Contract Mode

In Contract Mode, AIS Connect reports any issues occurring when the server is operational.It also sends PrimeCollect report and SystemReport along with the alarm data.

142

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

Warranty Mode is the default. Only the technicians managing the enterprise environment can change the Warranty Mode to Contract Mode.

This requires to set up a connection.

The handling of the embedded AIS Connect feature of the iRMC is described below. For more detailed information on the embedded AIS functionality, please refer to the manual "ServerView embedded Lifecycle Management (eLCM)".

Alternatively, you can download and automatically evaluate the

generated XML file by using a cURL or Visual Basic script (see section

"Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report" on page 467

Figure 66: AIS Connect page iRMC S4

143

System Information - Information on the server

AIS Connect Status

The AIS Connect Status group provides status information on the embedded AIS agent. The value "PRIMERGY iRMC EMBEDDED AGENT" for Asset Model is fix for all PRIMERGY servers. Relation indicates the mode in which AIS Connect is currently working (Warranty Mode or Contract Mode). The remaining values displayed in the AIS Connect Status group depend on the actions started and values configured in the AIS Connect page.

Figure 67: AIS Connect page - AIS Connect Status

AIS Connect Management

The AIS Connect Management group allows you to enable/disable AIS Connect. If

AIS Connect currently is in Contract Mode, you also have the option to switch the embedded AIS Connect agent to the Service Mode, in which the agent ignores all hardware-triggered alarms.

Figure 68: AIS Connect page - AIS Connect Management

Enable AIS Connect / Disable AIS Connect

Enables / disables AIS Connect.

Enable Service Mode / Disable Service Mode

Enables / disables the Service Mode.

Send Analysis Files Now

Sends the AIS Connect analysis file to the Technical Support of Fujitsu

Technology Solutions.

144

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

AIS Connect Configuration

The AIS Connect Configuration group allows you to configure your AIS Connect settings.

Figure 69: AIS Connect page - AIS Connect Configuration

Use Proxy

Here you can select whether an HTTP proxy server should be used. You can configure the proxy server settings in the Network Settings group on the Proxy Settings page (see

section "Proxy Settings - Configuring proxy settings" on page 262 ).

Country

AIS Connect RP country.

Apply

Activate your settings.

Clicking Apply saves your settings to the persistent memory of the iRMC. Your settings are therefore available after a page refresh or after the iRMC web interface was closed and opened again or in case of a power loss.

Test Connection

Tests the connection to the Service System of Fujitsu Technology

Solutions.

iRMC S4

145

System Information - Information on the server

AIS Connect Remote Session

The AIS Connect Remote Session group allows you to do the following:

– Enabling or disabling the policy for the remote session.

– Disconnecting any remote session.

– Forcing the embedded AIS Connect agent to immediately poll. This is useful for getting a quick response when you are in Warranty Mode.

Figure 70: AIS Connect page - AIS Connect Configuration

Allow Remote Sessions / Deny Remote Sessions

Allows / denies a remote session by enabling / disabling the policy for the remote session.

Disconnect Remote Sessions

Disconnects a remote session if there is any.

Force Poll

Forces the embedded AIS Connect agent to immediately poll.

146

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

7.4.4 System Report

The System Report page provides information on service incidents concerning server hardware/software directly out-of-band from the iRMC.

Information is provided on the following items:

– BIOS

– Processor

– Memory

– Temperature sensors

– Power supplies

– Voltage sensors

– IDPROMS

– PCI devices

– System Event Log

– Internal Event Log

– Boot status

– Management controllers

Alternatively, you can download and automatically evaluate the

generated XML file by using a cURL or Visual Basic script (see section

"Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report" on page 467

iRMC S4

147

System Information - Information on the server

Figure 71: System Report page

View in Browser

Displays the XML file containing the report information.

Save

Stores a report.xml file containing the report information in the local download directory. For each report file stored, a button report.xml is displayed at the bottom of the Sytem Report page. You can open a report file by clicking the corresponding button.

Using the PcSysScan.exe from the ServerView Suite DVD 2, you can transform the generated XML file into a human readable

HTML file as follows:

PcSysScan.exe -xmltransform report.xml report.html

148

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

7.4.5 CPU Utilization History

CPU Utilization provides data facilitating analysis of overall CPU usage for a selected time range. The collected data are displayed in a chart which includes maximum, minimum and average values of CPU load for single sample and for all samples in the full range of selected time scope.

CPU Utilization collects real data samples only when host system is on. When the host is off data is simulated (fake samples of value 0 are generated every

30 seconds).

CPU Utilization is only accessible for systems on which Node Manager supports

CUPS functionality (NM_SENS_CORE_CPUS).

Figure 72: CPU Utilization History page

CPU Utilization History Options

In the CPU Utilization History Options group you can modify the settings for the chart display.

CPU Monitoring Units

Unit of the CPU usage iRMC S4

149

System Information - Information on the server

CPU History period

Time range between one hour and five years, that you can select.

Samples for one hour, twelve hours and one day are temporary and are not stored. Samples for one week, two weeks, one month, one year and five years are stored in flash memory (file-based). Samples for one week, two weeks and one month are stored every hour. Samples for one year and five year periods are stored with one day resolution.

Enable CPU monitoring

Activates the monitoring in the defined time range.

Apply

Applies the selected options.

Delete History

Deletes the collected data.

CPU History Chart

Displays the data collected in a chart with the unit on the x-axis and the time range on the y-axis.

Save History

Opens a dialog to select the directory where to store the collected data.

150

iRMC

System Information - Information on the server

7.4.6 Network Inventory

The Network Inventory page provides information on the Ethernet ports of the iRMC.

Figure 73: Network Inventory page iRMC S4

151

System Information - Information on the server

7.4.7 Driver Monitor

The Driver Monitor page provides status information on the drivers installed on your system.

Figure 74: Driver Monitor page

Driver Monitor Status

Displays the driver monitoring summary status.

Monitored Components

Displays the monitored driver components.

Reset

Resets of the status of all driver components.

152

iRMC

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

7.5 RAID Information -



Information on the RAID systems

The RAID Information entry and the related pages are only displayed if the following requirements are met:

– Out of-band enabled RAID Controllers are available on the managed server

– The server is powered on, and the system is currently not in the BIOS

POST phase.

The RAID Information entry contains the links to the following pages:

–

"RAID Controller - Information on RAID controllers and associated batteries" on page 154

–

"Physical Disks - Information on RAID physical disks" on page 160

–

"Physical Disks - Information on RAID physical disks" on page 160

–

"Logical Drives - Information on RAID logical drives" on page 162

These pages, which are described in detail below, only display information on RAID systems. For managing RAID systems, ServerView

RAID is still needed.

iRMC S4

153

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

7.5.1 RAID Controller - Information on RAID controllers and associated batteries

For each RAID controller on the managed server, the RAID Controller page provides information on the RAID controller and the status of the associated battery.

Figure 75: RAID Information - Controllers page

154

iRMC

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

Details

Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the RAID controller / Battery.



Figure 76: RAID controller details iRMC S4

155

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

7.5.2 Enclosures - Information on RAID enclosures

The RAID enclosures information page provides information on each RAID enclosure on the managed server.

RAID enclosure: ETERNUS JX40

Figure 77: RAID Information - RAID enclosures page (ETERNUS JX40)

156

iRMC

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

Details

Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID enclosure.

Figure 78: RAID enclosures details (ETERNUS JX40information)

Locate

Turns on the identify LED of the RAID enclosure.

iRMC S4

157

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

RAID enclosure: ETERNUS JX60

Figure 79: RAID Information - RAID enclosures page (ETERNUS JX60)

Details

Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID enclosure.

158

iRMC

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

Figure 80: RAID enclosures details (ETERNUS JX60information)

Locate

Turns on the identify LED of the RAID enclosure.

iRMC S4

159

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

7.5.3 Physical Disks - Information on RAID physical disks

The Physical Disks page provides information on each RAID physical disk on the managed server.

Figure 81: RAID Information - Physical Disks page

160

iRMC

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

Details

Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID physical disk.



Figure 82: RAID physical disks details

Locate

Turns on the identify LED of the RAID physical disk.

iRMC S4

161

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

7.5.4 Logical Drives -



Information on RAID logical drives

The Logical Drives page provides information on the each RAID logical drives on the managed server.

Figure 83: RAID Information - Logical Drives page

162

iRMC

RAID Information - Information on the RAID systems

Details

Clicking on Details opens a new page which provides detailed information on the corresponding RAID logical drive.

Figure 84: Logical Drives Details

Locate

Turns on the identify LED of the RAID physical disk on which the logical drive resides.

iRMC S4

163

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

7.6 BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

The BIOS entry contains the links to the following pages:

–

"Backup/Restoration - Saving/Restoring BIOS single parameter settings to/from a file" on page 164

–

"BIOS - Updating BIOS via "upload from file" or via TFTP" on page 168

These pages are only displayed if the BIOS of the managed server supports the corresponding feature requirements.

7.6.1 Backup/Restoration - Saving/Restoring BIOS single parameter settings to/from a file

The Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter Settings page provides you with the following options:

– Back up single BIOS parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format and save the backup to a file.

– Restore single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView® WinSCU XML format from a file.

Figure 85: Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter Settings page

164

iRMC

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

7.6.1.1

Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format

The Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format group allows you to back up single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView® WinSCU

XML format and to save the backup to a file.

Figure 86: Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format

Backup Status

Only displayed if a backup is currently in process or has been completed:

Displays the status of the current backup process. Successful completion is indicated by "Operation Successful".

You can clear the status display by clicking the Clear Status button, which is only available if a status is currently displayed.

Backup Filename

This input field is disabled ("grayed out") by default. Initially, it displays the file name that is dynamically generated by the iRMC.

Edit Filename

Enables the Backup Filename field, thus allowing you to enter a file name

(.pre) of your choice.

Save Filename

Saves the edited file name, which, starting from now, will be the name displayed by default in the Backup Filename field.

iRMC S4

165

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

Request BIOS Parameter Backup

Initiates a backup of single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView®

WinSCU XML format. The backup (with the name specified in the

Backup Filename

field) is stored locally on the iRMC .

Once the backup process has started, the current process status is displayed under Backup Status.

Notes on the backup process:

– During the backup process, all buttons and input fields are disabled.

– If powered off, the managed server will be automatically powered on.

– If the server is powered on, a reboot is required. Otherwise, the backup process will remain in state "Boot Pending".

– The managed server is powered off after the backup has completed.

Save Backup to File

Only displayed when a backup of single BIOS parameters in

ServerView® WinSCU XML format is available in the local store of the iRMC:

Opens a browser dialog allowing you to save the iRMC -local copy of the

BIOS backup data to a file (<name -of-your-choice>.pre).

Clear Status

Only available if a status is currently displayed under Backup Status:

Clears the status information indicated under Backup Status.

7.6.1.2

Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU

XML format

The Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format group allows you to restore single BIOS parameter settings from a restoration file in

ServerView® WinSCU XML format.

166

iRMC

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

Figure 87: Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format

Restoration Status

The Restoration Status is only displayed if a restoration is currently in process or has been completed: Displays the status of the current restoration process. Successful completion is indicated by "Operation successful".

You can clear the status display by clicking the Clear Status button, which is only available if a status is currently displayed.

Restoration File

Clicking Browse opens a browser dialog allowing you to navigate to a file

(.pre) containing a backup of single BIOS parameters in the ServerView®

WinSCU XML format.

Upload

Initiates the restoration of single BIOS parameter settings based on the file specified in the Restoration File field.

Once the restoration process has started, the current process status is indicated under Restoration Status.

Notes on the restoration process:

– During the restoration process, all buttons and input fields are disabled.

– If powered off, the managed server will automatically be powered on.

– If the managed server is powered on, the server is to be rebooted. Otherwise the restoration process will remain in state "Boot Pending".

– The managed server is powered off after the restoration has completed.

Clear Status

Only available if a status is currently indicated under Restoration Status:

Clears the status information indicated under Restoration Status. iRMC S4

167

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

7.6.2 BIOS - Updating BIOS via "upload from file" or via

TFTP

The BIOS Update Settings page provides information on the current BIOS version on the managed server and allows you to update the BIOS via "upload from file" or via TFTP.

You will find the appropriate BIOS image for your PRIMERGY server on

ServerView Suite DVD 2 or you can download it under

http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/com/support/downloads.html

Figure 88: BIOS Update Settings page

Updating (flashing) the BIOS - course of events and important notes

The following overview applies for both updating the BIOS via "upload from file" and updating the BIOS via TFTP.

Details on how to initiate the steps described in this overview are described below in this section.

During the complete update process, the current update status is indicated in the BIOS Update Settings page.

168

iRMC

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

Figure 89: Updating BIOS - (TFTP) download successfully finished

Updating the BIOS comprises the following steps:

1. In the first step, you download the update file.

After the update file has been downloaded, the following occurs:

– If the server is powered off, the server will be automatically powered on to initiate the flash process.

– If the server is already powered on, you must restart the server to initiate the flash process.

CAUTION!

If a BIOS update is currently in progress, do not power-off or restart the server.

2. Subsequently, flash data is transferred to memory. The status display will indicate when the transfer has successfully completed.

3. Before the actual flashing process is started, the flash/update image is checked.

iRMC S4

169

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

Figure 90: Updating BIOS - checking update/flash image

4. Once the update/flash image is successfully verified, the actual flashing process is started. The status indication shows the percentage completion of the flash process.

5. After the BIOS update has successfully completed, the server is powered off. The following entry is written to the system event log (SEL):

BIOS TFTP or HTTP/HTTPS flash OK

BIOS Information

This group provides information on the current BIOS version on the managed server.

170

iRMC

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

BIOS Upload from File

The BIOS Upload from File group allows you to perform an online update of the

BIOS on the managed server. To do this, you must provide the current BIOS image in a file.

Figure 91: BIOS Update Settings page - BIOS Update from File

Update File

File in which the BIOS image is stored.

Browse

Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the update file.

Apply

Activates your settings and to start flashing the BIOS.

CAUTION!

If a BIOS update is currently in progress, do not power-off or restart the server.

iRMC S4

171

BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS

BIOS TFTP Update Settings

The BIOS TFTP Update Settings group allows you to perform an online update of the BIOS on the managed server. To do this, you must provide the current BIOS image in a file on a TFTP server. The BIOS is flashed when TFTP is started.

Figure 92: BIOS Update Settings page - BIOS TFTP Update Settings

TFTP Server

IP address or DNS name of the TFTP server on which the file with the

BIOS image is stored.

Update File

File in which the BIOS image is stored.

Apply

Activates your settings.

TFTP Test

Tests the connection to the TFTP server.

TFTP Start

Downloads the file containing the BIOS image from the TFTP server and to start flashing the BIOS.

CAUTION!

If a BIOS update is currently in progress, do not power-off or restart the server.

172

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

7.7 iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

The iRMC S4 entry contains the links to the following pages:

–

"iRMC S4 Information - Information on the iRMC" on page 174

–

"iRMC S4 Time - Time options for the iRMC S4" on page 178

–

"Save Configuration - Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings" on page 181

–

"Certificate Upload - Load the DSA/RSA Certificate and private DSA/RSA

Key" on page 183

–

"Generate a self-signed Certificate - Generate self-signed RSA Certificate" on page 190

–

"iRMC S4 Firmware Update" on page 192

iRMC S4

173

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

7.7.1 iRMC S4 Information - Information on the iRMC

The iRMC S4 Information page provides you with the following options:

– View information on the firmware and the SDRR version of the iRMC, set the firmware selector and load a firmware image and restart the iRMC.

– View information on the active iRMC sessions.

– Load license key onto the iRMC.

– Make settings for the layout of the web interface.

Figure 93: iRMC S4 Information page

174

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Running Firmware

Under Running Firmware, you can view information on the firmware and the

SDRR version of the iRMC and restart the iRMC.

Figure 94: iRMC S4 Information page - Firmware Information and iRMC reboot

Reboot iRMC S4

Reboots the iRMC.

The Reboot iRMC S4 button is disabled during the BIOS POST phase of the managed server.

Active Session Information

The Active Session Information group shows all the currently active iRMC sessions.

Figure 95: iRMC S4 Information page - Active Session Information iRMC S4

175

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

License Key

The License Key group allows you to load a license key onto the iRMC.

Figure 96: iRMC S4 Information page - License Key

You require a valid license key to be able to use the iRMC functions

Advanced Video Redirection

(see

page 324

), Virtual Media (see

page 332 ),

and Lifecycle Management (see

page 339 ). The license key for Lifecycle

Management is always purchased together with the iRMC SD card.

You can purchase the license key. The license key for Lifecycle

Management is always purchased together with the iRMC SD card

Upload

When you click this button, the license key specified in the input field is loaded onto the iRMC.

Miscellaneous iRMC S4 Options

The Miscellaneous iRMC S4 Options group allows you to make settings for the layout of the iRMC web interface.

Figure 97: iRMC Information page - Miscellaneous Options

176

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Default Language

Specifies the language (German / English / Japanese) that is set as default the next time the iRMC web interface is called.

Temperature Units

Specifies the unit used for displaying temperature values at the iRMC web interface (degrees Celsius / degrees Fahrenheit). This setting applies for the current session and is preset the next time the iRMC web interface is called.

Color Schema

Specifies the color scheme for displaying the iRMC web interface. This setting applies for the current session and is preset the next time the iRMC web interface is called.

Show Video Redirection (Java Web Start) in Navigation

Adds the Video Redirction (JWS) link to the navigation area. This allows you to directly start video redirection (Java Web Start) (see

"Video

Redirection - Starting AVR using Java" on page 329 ).

Show ’Logout’ in Navigation

This option is only available if the iRMC information page is displayed in the StyleguideVersion 2.2 color scheme.

Adds the Logout link to the navigation area. This allows you to logout via the navigation area.

Enable ’Automatic Apply’

All settings are enabled at the moment they are set. The Apply buttons within the individual pages of the iRMC are hidden until the Enable

Automatic Apply

option is deselected again.

Apply

Applies the selected option.

iRMC S4

177

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

7.7.2 iRMC S4 Time - Time options for the iRMC S4

The iRMC S4 Time page allows you to configure the time settings for the iRMC .

Figure 98: iRMC S4 Time page

178

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates iRMC S4 Time Options

The iRMC S4 Time Options group allows you to configure the time settings for the iRMC.

Figure 99: iRMC S4 Time page - iRMC Time Options

Time Mode

Here you can select whether the iRMC gets its time settings form the managed server or from an NTP server.

System RTC

The iRMC gets its time from the system clock of the managed server.

NTP Server

The iRMC uses the Network Time Protocol (NTP) to synchronize its own time to an NTP server, which serves as reference time source.

If you enable this option, an additional group, the NTP (Network

Time Protocol) Configuration

group, is shown allowing you to configure the required NTP settings (see below).

RTC Mode

Here you can select whether, starting from now, iRMC time will be shown in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) format or in Local Time format.

UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)

iRMC time will be shown in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) format.

Localtime

iRMC time will be shown in Local Time format.

iRMC S4

179

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Time Zone Configuration

In this group you can configure the time zone corresponding to the location where the PRIMERGY server is located.

Time Zone

List of time zones

Apply

Applies the selected settings.

NTP (Network Time Protocol) Configuration

The NTP (Network Time Protocol) Configuration group allows you to configure the required NTP settings if the NTP Server option has been enabled in the iRMC S4

Time Options

group.

Figure 100: iRMC S4 Time page - NTP Configuration

NTP Server 1

IP address or DNS name of the primary NTP server.

NTP Server 2

IP address or DNS name of the secondary NTP server.

Time Zone

Configure the Time Zone corresponding to the location where the

PRIMERGY server is located.

Apply

Activates the settings of this group.

180

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

7.7.3 Save Configuration -



Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings

The Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings page allows you to save the current firmware settings and a number of other settings for the iRMC in a file. Additionally, you can load the firmware settings onto the iRMC again.

If you want to save the user settings (Include User Settings), you require

Configure User Accounts

permission. In all other cases, Configure iRMC S4

settings

permission is sufficient.

Figure 101: Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings page

Save iRMC S4 firmware settings...

The data is exported from the iRMC in logical sections, each corresponding to a selected option.

The option All other Firmware settings causes the firmware to export all current

ConfigSpace values that have not already been exported together with another section. New implemented values are automatically exported with newer firmware versions.

iRMC S4

181

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Save

Click Save to save the selected settings.

Save All

Click Save All to save all the settings.

Import iRMC S4 Firmware settings in ServerView® WinSCU XML format from file

Config File

Configuration file (default: iRMC_S4_settings.bin) in the ServerView®

WinSCU XML format from which you want to load the firmware settings onto the iRMC.

Browse

Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the configuration file.

Upload

Uploads the firmware setting in selected file.

182

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

7.7.4 Certificate Upload - Load the DSA/RSA Certificate and private DSA/RSA Key

The Certificate Upload page allows you to load a signed X.509 DSA/RSA certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) and/or your private DSA/RSA key) onto the iRMC.

The iRMC is supplied with a predefined server certificate (default certificate). If you want to access the iRMC over secure SSL/TLS connections, it is recommended that you replace the certificate with one signed by a Certificate Authority (CA) as soon as possible.

Input format of the X.509 DSA/RSA certificate and the private DSA/RSA key:

The X.509 DSA/RSA certificate and the RSA/DSA must both be available in PEM-encoded format (ASCII/Base64). iRMC S4

183

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Figure 102: Certificate Upload page

184

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Displaying the currently valid (CA) DSA/RSA certificate

Ê In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click View Certificate to show the currently valid certificate.

In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click View CA Certificate to show the currently valid CA certificate.

Figure 103: Certificate Upload page - display of the currently valid certificate iRMC S4

185

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Restoring the default certificate/CA certificate

Ê In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click Default Certificate to restore the default certificate delivered with the firmware after you have confirmed that you wish to do so.

Ê In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click Default CA Certificate to restore the default CA certificate delivered with the firmware after you have confirmed that you wish to do so.

Figure 104: Certificate Upload page - Restoring the default CA certificate

186

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Loading a CA certificate from a local file

Use the CA Certificate upload from file group to load a CA certificate from a local file.

Figure 105: Loading a CA certificate from a local file

Proceed as follows:

Ê Save the CA certificate in a local file on the managed server.

Ê Specify this file under CA Certificate File by clicking the associated Browse... button and navigating to the file containing the CA certificate.

Ê Click Upload to load the certificate and/or the private key onto the iRMC.

When you upload the certificate and/or private key, all the existing

HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is automatically restarted. This process can take up to 30 seconds.

No explicit reset of the iRMC is required.

Ê Click View CA Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded successfully. iRMC S4

187

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Loading the DSA/RSA certificate and private DSA/RSA key from local files

You do this using the group



SSL Certificate and DSA/RSA private key upload from file

The private key and the certificate must be loaded on the iRMC at the same time.

Figure 106: Loading the DSA/RSA certificate/private DSA/RSA key from local files

Proceed as follows:

Ê Save the X.509 DSA/RSA certificate and the private DSA/RSA key in corresponding local files on the managed server.

Ê Specify the files Private Key File and Certificate File by clicking on the associated Browse button and navigating to the file which contains the private key or the certificate.

Click Upload to load the certificate and the private key onto the iRMC.

When you upload the certificate and private key, all the existing

HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is automatically restarted. This process can take up to 30 seconds.

No explicit reset of the iRMC is required.

Ê Click View Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded successfully.

188

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Entering the DSA/RSA certificate/private DSARSA key directly

You do this using the group SSL DSA/RSA certificate or DSA/RSA private upload via

copy & paste

Do not use this method to load a root certificate onto the iRMC. Always

load a root certificate using a file (see page 188

Figure 107: Entering the DSA/RSA certificate/private DSARSA key directly

Proceed as follows:

Copy the X.509 DSA certificate or the private DSA key to the input area.

You cannot simultaneously enter the certificate and key for the same upload.

Ê Click Upload to load the certificate or the private key onto the iRMC.

Use the Remote Manager to reset the iRMC (see

section "Service processor

- IP parameters, identification LED and iRMC S4 reset" on page 378

This is necessary in order to make a certificate or private key loaded onto the iRMC valid.

Click View Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded successfully. iRMC S4

189

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

7.7.5 Generate a self-signed Certificate -



Generate self-signed RSA Certificate

You can create a self-signed certificate using the Generate a self-signed Certificate page.

Figure 108: Generate a self-signed RSA Certificate page

190

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Certificate Information and Restore

The Certificate Information and Restore group allows you to view the currently valid DSA/RSA certificate and/or restore the default RSA/DSA certificate.

View Certificate

You can view the currently valid DSA/RSA certificate using this button.

Default Certificate

You can use this button to restore the default certificate delivered with the firmware after you have confirmed that you wish to do so.

Certificate Creation

Proceed as follows to create a self-signed certificate:

Enter the requisite details under Certificate Creation.

Click Create to create the certificate.

When generating the new certificate, all the existing HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is automatically restarted. This can take up to five minutes depending on the key length.

No explicit reset of the iRMC is required.

iRMC S4

191

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

7.7.6 iRMC S4 Firmware Update

The iRMC S4 Firmware Update page allows you to update the iRMC firmware online. To do this, you must provide the current firmware image either locally on a remote workstation or on a TFTP server.

Here you can also see information on the iRMC firmware and set the firmware selector.

Figure 109: iRMC S4 Firmware Update page

192

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Firmware Image Information

Under Firmware Image Information, you can view information on the firmware version and the SDRR version of the iRMC and set the firmware selector.

Figure 110: iRMC S4 Firmware Update - Firmware Information

Firmware Selector

You use the firmware selector to specify which firmware image is to be activated the next time the iRMC is rebooted.

You have the following options:

–

Auto - FW Image with highest FW version

The firmware image with the most recent version is selected automatically.

–

Low FW Image

The low firmware image is selected.

–

High FW Image

The high firmware image is selected.

–

Select FW Image with oldest FW version

The firmware image with the oldest version is selected.

–

Select most recently programmed FW

The most recently updated firmware image is selected.

–

Select least recently programmed FW

The least recently updated firmware image is selected.

Apply

Sets the firmware selector to the option you have set under

Firmware Selector

. iRMC S4

193

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Firmware Update from File

The Firmware Update from File group allows you to update the iRMC firmware online. To do this, you must provide the current firmware image in a file on a remote workstation.

You will find the appropriate firmware image for your PRIMERGY server on

ServerView Suite DVD 2 or you can download it under

http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/com/support/downloads.html

Figure 111: iRMC S4 Firmware Update page - Firmware Update from File

Flash Selector

Specify what iRMC firmware is to be updated.

You have the following options:

–

Auto - inactive firmware

The inactive firmware is automatically selected.

–

Low Firmware Image

The low firmware image (firmware image 1) is selected.

–

High Firmware Image

The high firmware image (firmware image 2) is selected.

194

iRMC

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Update file

File in which the firmware image is stored.

Only complete firmware images comprising a firmware version

and a SDRR version can be updated (e.g.

RX30S8_07.01F_sdr03.47.bin

Browse

Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the update file.

Apply

Activates your settings and starts updating the iRMC firmware.

iRMC S4 TFTP Settings

The iRMC S4 TFTP Settings group allows you to update the iRMC firmware online. To do this, you must provide the current firmware image in a file on a

TFTP server.

You will find the appropriate firmware image for your PRIMERGY server on

ServerView Suite DVD 2 or you can download it under

http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/com/support/downloads.html

Figure 112: iRMC S4 Firmware Update page - iRMC S4 TFTP Settings

TFTP Server

IP address or DNS name of the TFTP server on which the file with the firmware image is stored.

Update file

File in which the firmware image is stored.

Only complete firmware image can be updated (e.g.

RX30S8_07.01F_sdr03.47.bin

iRMC S4

195

iRMC S4 - Information, firmware and certificates

Flash Selector

Specify what iRMC firmware is to be updated.

You have the following options:

–

Auto - inactive firmware

The inactive firmware is automatically selected.

–

Low Firmware Image

The low firmware image (firmware image 1) is selected.

–

High Firmware Image

The high firmware image (firmware image 2) is selected.

Apply

Activates your settings.

TFTP Test

Tests the connection to the TFTP server.

TFTP Start

Downloads the file containing the firmware image from the TFTP server and starts updating the iRMC firmware.

196

iRMC

Power Management

7.8 Power Management

The Power Management entry contains the links to the power management pages for your PRIMERGY server:

–

"Power On/Off - power the server up/down" on page 198 .

–

"Power Options - Configuring power management for the server" on page 203 .

–

"Power Supply Info - Power supply and IDPROM data for the FRU components" on page 206

iRMC S4

197

Power Management

7.8.1 Power On/Off - power the server up/down

The Power On/Off page allows you to power the managed server on and off. You are informed of the server’s current power status and are also able to configure the behavior of the server during the next boot operation.

Figure 113: Power On/Off page

Power Status Summary

The Power Status Summary group provides information on the current power status of the server and on the causes for the most recent Power On/Power Off.

In addition, a Power On counter records the total months, days and minutes during which the server has been powered.

Figure 114: Power On/Off page - Power Status Summary

198

iRMC

Power Management

Boot Options

The Boot Options group allows you to configure the behavior of the system each time it is booted. You can set whether the BIOS is to interrupt the boot process for the system if errors occur during the POST phase.

The options set here only apply to the next boot operation. After this, the default mechanism applies again.

Figure 115: Power Management - Boot Options page

Error Halt Settings

Specifies the desired BIOS behavior.

Continue

Continue the boot process if errors occur during the POST phase.

Halt on errors

Interrupt the boot process if errors occur during the POST phase.

Boot Device Selector

Storage medium you wish to boot from.

The following options are available:

–

No change

: The system is booted from the same storage medium as previously.

–

PXE/iSCSI

: The system is booted from PXE/iSCSI over the network.

–

Harddrive

: The system is booted from hard disk.

–

CDROM/DVD

: The system is booted from CD /DVD.

–

Floppy

: The system is booted from floppy disk.

–

BIOS Setup

: The system enters BIOS setup when booting. iRMC S4

199

Power Management

Boot Type

Determines the boot mode in which the system will be started at the next boot.

Depending on the server operating system, the following options are available for selection:

PC compatible (legacy)

The system is booted in legacy BIOS-compatibility mode.

Extensible Firmware Interface Boot (EFI)

The system is booted in UEFI boot mode (only on 64-bit operating systems).

Next Boot only

Settings apply to the next boot only.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

200

iRMC

Power Management

Power Control - powering the server up and down/rebooting the server

The Power Control group allows you to power the server up/down or to reboot the server.

Figure 116: Power On/Off page, Restart (server is powered up)

Figure 117: Power On/Off page, Restart (server is powered down)

Power On

Switches the server on.

Immediate Power Off

Powers the server down, regardless of the status of the operating system.

Immediate Reset

Completely restarts the server (cold start), regardless of the status of the operating system.

Pulse NMI

Initiates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). A NMI is a processor interrupt that cannot be ignored by standard interrupt masking techniques in the system.

Press Power Button

Depending on the operating system installed and the action configured, you can trigger various actions by briefly pressing the power-off button.

These actions could be shutting down the computer or switching it to standby mode or sleep mode. iRMC S4

201

Power Management

Power Cycle

Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a configured period. You can configure this time in the Power Cycle Delay

field of the ASR&R Options group (see page 246

Graceful Power Off (Shutdown)

Graceful shutdown and power off.



This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as “Connected”.

Graceful Reset (Reboot)

Graceful shutdown and reboot.



This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as “Connected”.

Ê Click Apply to start the required action.

202

iRMC

Power Management

7.8.2 Power Options -



Configuring power management for the server

The Power Options page allows you to define the server’s behavior after a power outage and specify the server’s power on/off times.

Figure 118: Power Options page iRMC S4

203

Power Management

Power Restore Policy - Specify behavior of the server after a power outage

The Power Restore Policy group allows you to specify the server’s power management behavior after a power outage.

Figure 119: Power Options page, Power Restore Policy

Always power off

The server always remains powered down after a power outage.

Always power on

The server is always powered up again after a power outage.

Restore to powered state prior to power loss

The power up/down status of the server is restored to the status prior to the power outage.

Click Apply to activate your settings.

The configured action will be performed after a power outage.

204

iRMC

Power Management

Power On/Off Time - Specify power on/off times for the server

The input fields of the Power On/Off Time group allow you to specify the times at which the server is powered up/down for the individual days of the week or for specified times during the day.

Specifications in the Everyday field take priority!

The Trap fields also allow you to configure whether the iRMC sends an SNMP trap to the management console before a planned power-on / power-off of the managed server and, if so, how many minutes before the event this should be done. No traps are sent if you specify the value “0”.

Figure 120: Power Options page, Power On/Off Time iRMC S4

205

Power Management

7.8.3 Power Supply Info - Power supply and IDPROM data for the FRU components

The Power Supply Info page provides you with information on the power supply specifications and the IDPROM data of the FRUs of the server.

The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the

CSS (Customer Self Service) functionality is supported.

Figure 121: Power Supply Info page

206

iRMC

Power Consumption

7.9 Power Consumption

The Power Consumption entry contains the links to the pages for monitoring and controlling the power consumption of the managed server:

–

"Power Consumption Configuration - Configure power consumption of the server" on page 208

–

"Power Options - Configuring power management for the server" on page 203 . (Not shown on all servers with iRMC.)

–

"Power History - Show server power consumption" on page 215 (Not shown

on all servers with iRMC.) iRMC S4

207

Power Consumption

7.9.1 Power Consumption Configuration - Configure power consumption of the server

The Power Consumption Configuration page allows you to specify the mode the iRMC uses to control the power consumption of your PRIMERGY server.

Figure 122: Power Consumption Configuration page

Prerequisite:

The following requirements must be met in order to configure power consumption control:

– The managed PRIMERGY server must support this feature.

– The Enhanced Speed Step or the Processor Power Management option must be enabled in the Advanced Menu of the BIOS setup.

If you set the “Power Limit” power control mode in the Power Consumption

Options

group or in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration, the

Power Limit Options

group is also displayed (see page 210

208

iRMC

Power Consumption

Power Consumption Options

The Power Consumption Options group allows you to select the power control mode and specify whether the power consumption should be monitored over time.

Power Control Mode

Mode for controlling the power consumption of the managed server:

– O/S controlled:

Power Consumption is controlled by the operating system of the managed server.

–

Minimum Power

The iRMC controls the server to achieve the lowest possible power consumption. In this event, performance is not always ideal.

–

Scheduled

The iRMC controls power consumption in accordance with a schedule (see

"Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration" on page 210

–

Power Limit

The Power Limit Options group is displayed (see "Power Limit Options" on page 212

Power Monitoring Units

Unit of electrical power used to display power consumption:

–

Watt

–

BTU/h

(British Thermal Unit/hour, 1 BTU/h corresponds to 0.293

Watt). iRMC S4

209

Power Consumption

Enable Power Monitoring

If you enable this option, power consumption is monitored over time.

This setting only takes effect on PRIMERGY servers that support power monitoring.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration

The Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group allows you to specify in detail the schedules and modes (O/S controlled, Minimum Power, Power Limit) that the iRMC uses to control power consumption on the managed server.

The Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group only appears if you have enabled the power control mode scheduled in the Power Consumption

Options

group.

Configuration for scheduled power control mode assumes that the

Enhanced Speed Step

option has been enabled in the BIOS setup. If this is not the case, a message to this effect is displayed.

If this message appears even though “Enhanced Speed Step” is enabled, this may be because:

– The CPU (e.g. low-power CPU) of the server does not support scheduled power control.

– The system is currently in the BIOS POST phase.

210

iRMC

Power Consumption

Figure 123: Power Consumption Configuration page (scheduled)

Time 1

Time [hh:ss] at which the iRMC starts power control as defined in Mode

on the relevant day of the week.

Time 2

Time [hh:ss] at which the iRMC starts power control as defined in Mode

on the relevant day of the week.

Mode 1

Power consumption mode used by the iRMC for power control as of Time

on the relevant day of the week.

Mode 2

Power consumption mode used by the iRMC for power control as of Time

on the relevant day of the week.

Set Time 1 < Time 2, otherwise the power control mode specified under

Mode 2

will only be activated at Time 2 on the relevant day of the following week.

Specifications in the Everyday field take priority.

iRMC S4

211

Power Consumption

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

You can also configure scheduled power control using the Server

Configuration Manager (see

chapter "Configuring iRMC S4 using the

Server Configuration Manager" on page 387

Power Limit Options

The Power Limit Options group is displayed under the following circumstances:

– The power control mode Power Limit is selected and enabled in the Power

Consumption Options

group.

– The power control mode Scheduled is enabled in the Power Consumption

Options

group and the power control mode Power Limit is enabled at least once in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group.

The power limit then applies to all periods for which this power control mode is enabled in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group.

Figure 124: Power Consumption Configuration page (Power Limit Options)

212

iRMC

Power Consumption

Power Limit

Maximum power consumption (in Watts).

When this is reached, the action defined in the Action Reaching Power

Limit

field is performed. When the threshold is exceeded, a warning message is written to the iRMC S4 SEL ("CPU Throttlink activated by

Power Capping").

Target for Power Regulation

The iRMC attempts to adjust the power consumption to this value which is to be specified as a percentage of the maximum power consumption specified in the Power Limit field.

Tolerance Time Before Action

Period (in minutes) the Power Limit needs to be exceeded. Not until then the action specified in the Action Reaching Power Limit field will be performed.

Action Reaching Power Limit

Action to be performed when the PowerLimit was exceeded for at least the period specified in the Tolerance Time Before Action field.

Continue

No action is performed.

Graceful Power Off (Shutdown)

Shut down the system "gracefully" and power it down.

This option is only supported if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC as “Connected”.

Immediate Power Off

The server is immediately powered down irrespective of the status of the operating system.

Enable dynamic Power Control

The power limit is controlled dynamically. If this option is enabled, the iRMC lowers power consumption of the server as soon as the Power Limit is exceeded. The iRMC attempts to adjust power consumption to the level specified in the Target for Power Regulation field. iRMC S4

213

Power Consumption

7.9.2 Current Power Consumption -



Show the current power consumption

This view is not supported by all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC.

The Current Power Consumption page shows the current power consumption of the system components and of the overall system.

Figure 125: Current Power Consumption page

214

iRMC

Power Consumption

7.9.3 Power History -



Show server power consumption

The Power Consumption History page charts the power consumption of your

PRIMERGY server.

This page is not shown on all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC.

Figure 126: Power Consumption History page iRMC S4

215

Power Consumption

Current Power Consumption

This option is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.

Under Current Power Consumption you can see all the measurements for the server power consumption in the current interval: current, minimum, maximum and average power consumption.

A graphical display also shows the current power consumption of the server compared with the maximum possible power consumption.

Figure 127: Power Consumption History - Current Power Consumption

Power History Options

You specify the parameters for displaying the power consumption under Power

History Options.

Figure 128: Power Consumption History - Power History Options

Power Monitoring Units

Electrical power units:

– Watt

–

BTU/h

(British Thermal Unit/hour, 1 BTU/h corresponds to



0.293 Watt).

216

iRMC

Power Consumption

Power History Period

Period for which the power consumption is charted.

The following intervals can be selected:

1 hour

Default.



Measurements for the last hour (60 values). Since one measurement is generated every minute, this shows all the measurements of the last hour.

12 hours

Measurements for the last 12 hours. One measurement is shown for each five-minute period (every 5th measurement, 144 values in all).

1 day

Measurements for the last 24 hours. One measurement is shown for each 10-minute period (every 10th measurement, 144 values in all).

1 week

The measurements for the last week. One measurement per hour is shown (every 60th measurement, 168 values in all).

2 weeks

The measurements for the last month. One measurement is shown for each period of approx four hours (every 120th measurement, 168 values in all).

1 month

The measurements for the last 6 months. One measurement is shown for each period of approx one day (every 240th measurement, 180 values in all).

1 year

Measurements for the last 12 months. One measurement is shown for each two-day period (every 2880th measurement, 180 values in all).

5 years

Measurements for the last 5 years. One measurement is shown for each two-day period (every 2880th measurement, 180 values in all). iRMC S4

217

Power Consumption

Enable Power Monitoring

Specifies whether power monitoring is to be carried out. Power

Monitoring is enabled by default.

This setting only applies to PRIMERGY servers that support consumption logging.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

Click Delete History to delete the displayed data.

Power History Chart

Power History Chart

shows the power consumption of the managed server over time in the form of a graph (using the settings made under Power History

Options

). The difference between the actual power consumption and the power consumption displayed in the power history chart may amount to about 20%.

Figure 129: Power Consumption History - Power History Chart

218

iRMC

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

7.10 Sensors - Check status of the sensors

The “Sensors” entry provides you with pages which allow you to check the statuses of sensors of the managed server:

–

"Fans - Check fans" on page 220 .

–

"Temperature - Report the temperature of the server components" on page 222 .

–

"Voltages - Report voltage sensor information" on page 224

–

"Power Supply - Check power supply" on page 225 .

–

"Component Status - Check status of the server components" on page 227 .

To facilitate checking the status, the sensor status is not only shown in the form of the current value, but also using a color code and a status icon:

Black (font color)/ The measured value is within the normal operational value range.

Orange (font color)/ The measured value has exceeded the warning threshold.



System operation is not yet jeopardized.

Red (font color)/

Table 7: Status of the sensors

The measured value has exceeded the critical threshold.



System operation may be jeopardized and there is a risk of loss of data integrity.

iRMC S4

219

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

7.10.1 Fans - Check fans

The Fans page provides information on fans and their status.

Figure 130: Fans page

Fan Test - Test fans

The Fan Test group allows you to specify a time at which the fan test is started automatically or to start the fan test explicitly.

Fan Test performs the fan test with a speed near to the currently required speed. Thus, the fan test is not acoustically noticeable.

Fan Check Time

Enter the time at which the fan test is to be started automatically.

Disable Fan Test

Select this option to disable fan testing.

220

iRMC

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

Ê Click Start Fan Test to start the fan test explicitly.

System Fans - Specify server behavior in the event that a fan fails

The System Fans group provides you with information on the status of the fans.

You can use the options or buttons to select individual fans or all the fans and specify whether the server should be shut down after a specified number of seconds if this fan fails.

Select all

Selects all fans.

Deselect all

All selections are cancelled.

Select the fans for which you wish to define the behavior in the event of a fault.

Ê Define the behavior in the event of a fault using the list at the bottom of the work area:

– Choose continue if the server is not to be shut down if the selected fans fail.

– Choose Shutdown and Power-off if the server is to be shut down and powered down if the selected fans fail.

If you choose this option, you must also specify the time in seconds between failure of the fan and shutdown of the server (Shutdown Delay) in the field to the right of the list.

Shutdown and Power-off will be executed in case of a fan failure regardless of whether ServerView agents are running on the managed server.

In the case of redundant fans, shutdown is only initiated if more than one fan is faulty and Shutdown and Power-off is also set for these fans.

Ê Click Apply to the selected Fans to activate your settings for the selected fans.

If in the BIOS Setup the fans of the managed node are set to high speed, a note informs about this setting.

iRMC S4

221

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

7.10.2 Temperature - Report the temperature of the server components

The Temperature page provides information on the status of the temperature sensors which measure the temperature at the server components, such as the

CPU and the Memory Module and the ambient temperature.

Figure 131: Temperature page

You can use the options or buttons to select individual temperature sensors or all the temperature sensors and specify whether the server is to be shut down if the critical temperature is reached at the selected sensors.

222

iRMC

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

Select all

Selects all temperature sensors.

Deselect all

All selections are cancelled.

Ê Select the sensors for which you wish to define the behavior in the event that the critical temperature is reached.

Define the behavior in the event that the critical temperature is reached using the list at the bottom of the work area:

– Choose continue if the server is not to be shut down if the critical temperature is reached at the selected sensors.

– Choose Shutdown and Power-off if the server is to be shut down and powered down if the critical temperature is reached at the selected sensors.

Shutdown and Power-off is executed when the critical temperature is reached, regardless of whether ServerView agents are running on the managed server.

Ê Click Apply to the selected Sensors to activate your settings for the selected temperature sensors.

iRMC S4

223

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

7.10.3 Voltages - Report voltage sensor information

The Voltages page provides information on the status of voltage sensors assigned to the server components.

Figure 132: Voltages page

224

iRMC

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

7.10.4 Power Supply - Check power supply

The Power Supply page provides information on the power supplied from the power supply units. For some server types, the Power Supply page also allows you to configure power supply redundancy settings.

Figure 133: Power Supply page iRMC S4

225

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

Supported for iRMC S4



Power Supply Redundancy Configuration

This functionality can only be configured on systems with more the two

PSUs

The Power Supply Redundancy Configuration group allows you to set the redundancy mode for the managed server. It depends on the servers capabilities which options are actually available.

PSU Redundancy 1 + 1 Spare PSU

System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 2 PSUs in total.

PSU Redundancy 2+ 1 Spare PSU

System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 3 PSUs in total.

PSU Redundancy 3+ 1 Spare PSU

System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 4 PSUs in total.

AC Redundancy 2 + 2 (2 AC sources)

2 of the 4 PSUs are each connected to a separate AC source. This ensures that the system can continue operation even if a power line or a single PSU fails.

AC Redundancy 1 + 1 (2 AC sources)

Each PSU (of 2 PSUs in total) is connected to a separate AC source. This ensures that the system can continue operation even if a power line or a single PSU fails.

226

iRMC

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

7.10.5 Component Status -



Check status of the server components

The Component Status page provides information on the status of the server components. The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the CSS (Customer Self Service) functionality is supported.

When the server chassis is opened, components with an LED can be easily identified by clicking the corresponding Identify button in the Components Status page.

Figure 134: Component Status page iRMC S4

227

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

Identify

Lights-up the LED that is attached to the related sever component. The

LED’s label turns to Identify Off. A green LED symbol instead of the status icon is shown in the leftmost column of the Component Status page.

If a server component has no LED, the Identify button is grayedout and labeled No LED.

Identify Off

Lights-off the LED that is attached to the related sever component. The

LED’s label turns to Identify. The green LED symbol in the leftmost column of the Component Status page disappears and the status symbol is shown again.

Entries with Designation "iRMC", "Agent", "BIOS", or "VIOM"

Entries with the Designation "iRMC", "Agent", "BIOS", or "VIOM" indicate that the iRMC, the agent, the BIOS, or VIOM has detected an error. It does not mean that the iRMC, the agent, the BIOS, or VIOM itself is defective.

Entries with Designation "HDD" and "HDD<n>, PCIeSSD<n>, agentless

HDD monitoring ("out-of-band" HDD monitoring)

Entries with the Designation "HDD" or "HDD<n>", or "PCIsSSD<n>" (with n = 0,

1, 2, ...) indicate the statuses of Hard Disk Drives (HDD) or Solid State Disks

(SSD):

– HDD/SSD component status is only displayed if ServerView RAID is installed.

– The entry with Designation "HDD" indicates the overall HDD status of the server by summarizing the statuses of the individual HDDs.

– The overall HDD status of the server is read and reported to the iRMC by the ServerView agents and the ServerView RAID Manager.

– An entry with Designation "HDD<n>" or "PCIeSSD<n>" (with n = 0, 1, 2, ...) indicates the status of an individual HDD or SSD.

228

iRMC

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

Please note:

– The iRMC supports this feature only if the backplane supports this feature.

– This feature is deactivated if "RAID Information" is enabled.

– This feature is only supported if the managed PRIMERGY server supports the "agentless HDD monitoring" function (also known as

"out-of-band HDD monitoring").

If these requirements are met, the HDD<n> status of each individual

HDD and the "PCIeSSD<n>" status of each SSD is reported directly to the iRMC i.e. without using the ServerView agents.

Figure 135: Status display for individual HDDs and SSDs iRMC S4

229

Sensors - Check status of the sensors

The precise entries displayed in the Component Status Sensor Information table, therefore, depend on the server state and whether the server supports "agentless HDD monitoring":

– The entry with Designation "HDD" only shows a status in the Signal

Status

column if the ServerView agents and the ServerView RAID

Manager are installed and running on the managed server.

Otherwise, "N/A" (not available) is displayed in the Signal Status column instead.

– HDD or SSD Component Status is not shown.

– Status Prefail is not supported for all HDDs or SSDs.

– The entries with Designation "HDD<n> or "PCIeSSD<n>" (with n = 0,

1, 2, ...) are only displayed if the managed server supports "agentless

HDD monitoring".

230

iRMC

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

7.11 System Event Log and Internal Event Log

The Event Log entry in the navigation area contains the links to the pages for viewing and configuring the IPMI event log (system event log, SEL) and the iRMC internal event log. An additional page allows you to configure syslog forwarding which forwards the entries of the SEL and/or the internal event log to dedicated syslog servers. The following pages are available:

–

"System Event Log Content - Show information on the SEL and the SEL entries" on page 232 .

The internal event log contains entries providing information on audit events

(logon events, AVR connection events, etc.) and additional information (e.g.

IPv6 related information and LDAP user names).

–

"Internal Event Log - Show information on the internal event log and the associated entries" on page 235 .

The IPMI SEL contains entries providing information on events like operating system boots / shutdowns, fan failures, and iRMC firmware flashes.

–

"System Event Log Configuration - Configure IPMI SEL and internal event log" on page 238 .

–

"Syslog Configuration - configure syslog forwarding for SEL and internal event log" on page 241 .

Colored icons are assigned to the various event / error categories to improve clarity:

Critical

Major

Minor

Informational

Customer Self Service (CSS) event

Table 8: System event log / internal event log content - error categories iRMC S4

231

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

7.11.1 System Event Log Content -



Show information on the SEL and the SEL entries

The System Event Log Content page provides information on the IPMI SEL and displays the SEL entries. The IPMI SEL contains entries providing information on events like operating system boots / shutdowns, fan failures, and iRMC firmware flashes.

The CSS Event column indicates for each of the events whether the event was triggered by a CSS (Customer Self Service) component.

Figure 136: System Event Log Content page

232

iRMC

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

System Event Log Information

The System Event Log Information group informs you of the number of entries in the IPMI SEL. It also indicates the time when the last entries were added or deleted.

Figure 137: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Information

Clear Event Log

Clears all entries from the IPMI SEL.

Save Event Log

Downloads the file iRMC S4_EventLog.sel, which contains the IPMI SEL entries.

iRMC S4

233

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

System Event Log Content

The System Event Log Content group displays the SEL entries filtered by severity class.

You can modify the filter criteria for the duration of the current session in the System Event Log Content group. However, the settings you make here are only valid until the next logout. After that, the default settings apply again.

Figure 138: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Content

Display Critical

, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info, CSS only

If you wish, you can choose one or more severity levels other than the default values here.

Show Resolutions

If you choose this option, a proposal for solution will be displayed for each

SEL entry of severity level Critical or Major.

Click Apply to activate your settings for the duration of the current session.

234

iRMC

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

7.11.2 Internal Event Log -



Show information on the internal event log and the associated entries

The Internal Event Log Information page provides information on the internal event log and displays the associated entries. The internal event log comprises audit events (login events, AVR connection events, etc.) and additional information (e.g. IPv6 related information and LDAP user names).

Figure 139: InternalEvent Log Content page iRMC S4

235

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

Internal Event Log Information

The Internal Event Log Information group informs you of the number of entries in the internal event log. It also indicates the time when the last entries were added or deleted.

Figure 140: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Information

Clear Internal Event Log

Click Clear Internal Event Log to clear all the entries in the internal event log.

Save Internal Event Log

After you have clicked Save Internal Event Log, the iRMC allows you to download the file iRMC S4_InternalEventLog.sel which contains the entries of the internal event log.

236

iRMC

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

Internal Event Log Content

The Internal Event Log Content group displays the internal event log entries filtered by severity class.

You can modify the filter criteria for the duration of the current session in the Internal Event Log Content group. However, the settings you make here are only valid until the next logout. After that, the default settings apply again.

Figure 141: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Content

Display Critical

, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info

If you wish, you can choose one or more severity levels other than the default values here.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings for the duration of the current session.

iRMC S4

237

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

7.11.3 System Event Log Configuration -



Configure IPMI SEL and internal event log

On the System Event Log Configuration page, you can configure the IPMI system event log (SEL) and the internal event log.

You can configure for each of the event logs

– the entries which are displayed by default on the System Event Log Content

page (see page 232 ) and on the Internal Event Log Information page (see

page 235

), respectively.

– whether IPMI SEL and internal event log are organized as a ring buffer or a linear buffer.

Figure 142: Event Log Configuration page

238

iRMC

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

Default System Event Log display filtering

In this group you can configure which entries are displayed by default.

Display Critical

, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info, CSS only

Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log entries should be displayed by default on the on the System Event Log Content

page (see page 232

Show Resolutions

If you choose this option, the cause of the entry and a proposal for resolution will be displayed for each SEL entry of severity level Critical,

Major

, or Minor.

Ring Buffer

The event log is organized as a ring buffer.

Linear Buffer

The event log is organized as a linear buffer. When the linear event log has been completely filled, it is not possible to add any further entries.

Apply

Activates your settings.

Default Internal Eventlog display filtering

Display Critical

, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info

Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log entries should be displayed by default on the on the Internal Event Log Content

page (see page 235

Ring Buffer

The event log is organized as a ring buffer.

Linear Buffer

The event log is organized as a linear buffer. When the linear event log has been completely filled, it is not possible to add any further entries

Apply

Activates your settings.

iRMC S4

239

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

Helpdesk Information

Figure 143: Helpdesk Information

Help desk

String used to display the Help Desk

Apply

Activates your settings.

Add Service Notice

In the text field of the Add Service Notice group you can enter a service notice which will be stored in the Internal Event Log of the iRMC.

Figure 144: Helpdesk Information

Apply

Activates your settings.

240

iRMC

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

7.11.4 Syslog Configuration - configure syslog forwarding for SEL and internal event log

On the Syslog Configuration page, you can configure syslog forwarding which forwards the events (entries) of SEL and/or the internal event log to dedicated syslog servers.

Figure 145: Syslog Configuration page iRMC S4

241

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

Syslog forwarding options

The Syslog forwarding options group allows you to enable/disable syslog forwarding.

Figure 146: Syslog Configuration page - Syslog Forwarding Options

Event forwarding through Syslog Enabled

Enables/disables the forwarding of the events of SEL and/or internal event log to up to three syslog server configured below.

Syslog server addresses

The Syslog server addresses group allows you to configure the parameters for up to three syslog servers.

Figure 147: Syslog Configuration page - Syslog server addresses

Server 1 / 2 / 3

IP address or DNS name of the respective syslog Server.

Server 1 / 2 / 3 Port

Input port at which syslog Server 1 / 2 / 3 receives the forwarded events.

242

iRMC

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

Protocol

Protocol (TCP or UDP) used for transferring the events to the corresponding syslog server.

IEL

Events of the internal event log are to be forwarded to the corresponding syslog server.

SEL

Events of the System Event Log (SEL) are to be forwarded to the corresponding syslog server.

Syslog filtering options

The Syslog filtering options group allows you to filter the forwarded events by various criteria.

Figure 148: Syslog Configuration page - Syslog filtering options - Basic settings

Figure 149: Syslog Configuration page - Syslog filtering options - Extended settings iRMC S4

243

System Event Log and Internal Event Log

Filtering scope

Determines the filtering granularity.

Basic

Basic filtering which does not distinguish between the individual server components, special events, etc.

Message severity INFORMATIONAL, MINOR, MAJOR, CRITICAL

Here you select one or more severity levels for which event

log entries should be forwarded to syslog (see page 235 ).

Extended

Filtering can be configured separately for each the following component-level or system-specific event types: Fan Sensors,

Temperature Sensors

, Critical Hardware Errors, System Hang, POST

Errors

, Security, System Status, Disk Drivers & Controllers, Network

Interface

, Remote Management, System Power, Memory, and Other.

For each event type, the following options are available:

None

No event is forwarded.

Critical

Only events with status Critical are forwarded.

Warning

Only events with status Critical or Warning are forwarded.

All

All events are forwarded.

Click Apply to activate your settings.

244

iRMC

Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings

7.12 Server Management Information -



Configuring the server settings

The Server Management Information page allows you to configure the following settings on the server:

– ASR&R (automatic server reconfiguration and restart) settings for the server

(see page 246 )

– Watchdog settings (see

page 247

)

– Format in which the iRMC device will return UUID information (see

page 249 )

Figure 150: Server Management Information page iRMC S4

245

Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings

ASR&R Options - Configure ASR&R settings

The ASR&R Options group allows you to configure the ASR&R (automatic server reconfiguration and restart) settings for the server.

The settings made on the ASR&R Options group become active the next time the managed server is started.

Figure 151: Server Management Information page, ASR&R Options

ASR&R Boot Delay (1 - 30)

Delay time (in minutes) before the server restarts (1-30 minutes).

Retry counter Max (0 - 7)

Maximum number of restart attempts that should be permitted for the server after a critical error (up to 7).

Retry counter (0 - Max)

Number of restart attempts that a server should attempt after a critical error (maximum value is the value set under Retry counter Max).

BIOS Recovery Flash

Enables/disables the BIOS recovery flash bit:

–

Enabled



The next time the system is booted, the BIOS is automatically flashed.

–

Disabled



The next time the system is booted, the BIOS is not automatically flashed.

246

iRMC

Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings

The Enabled setting is of value if the operating system no longer boots after the firmware has been updated. A BIOS recovery flash is then performed automatically the next time the system is booted from the DOS floppy (or a DOS floppy image).

After a BIOS recovery flash has been performed successfully, reset the BIOS Recovery Flash bit to disabled.

Prevent Power On on Critical Temperature

If enabled, prevents the server from being powered on in case of critical temperature occurrence.

Power Cycle Delay (0 - 15)

Time (in seconds) between powering down and powering up during a power cycle.

Ê Click Apply to save your settings.

The configured settings are saved and the actions which have been configured are performed in the appropriate circumstances.

Watchdog Settings - Configure software watchdog and boot watchdog

The Watchdog Settings group allows you configure the software watchdog and the boot watchdog.

The settings made on the ASR&R Options group become active the next time the managed server is started.

Figure 152: Server Management Information page - Watchdog Settings

The software watchdog monitors the activities of systems using the ServerView agents. The software watchdog is activated when the ServerView agents and the operating system have been completely initialized.



The ServerView agents contact the iRMC at defined intervals.

If no more messages are received from a ServerView agent, it is assumed that the system is no longer functioning correctly.



You can specify an action to be performed if this happens.

iRMC S4

247

Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings

The boot watchdog monitors the phase between startup of the system and the time at which the ServerView agents become available.



If the ServerView agents do not establish a connection to the iRMC of the server within a specified time, it is assumed that the boot process has not been successful.



You can specify an action to be performed if this happens.

Proceed as follows:

Check or uncheck the option(s) under Enabled for the Software Watchdog and/or Boot Watchdog.

Ê If you have activated either of these options, you can configure the following settings after Software Watchdog and/or Boot Watchdog:

Continue

No action is performed when the watchdog has expired, i.e. the server continues to run. An entry is made in the event log.

Reset

The server management software triggers a system reset.

Power Cycle

The server is powered down and immediately powered up again.

As appropriate, enter the time (in minutes) after which this action is to be performed following after timeout delay.

The boot watchdog must wait until the system has been started. You therefore have to specify a sufficient period for after timeout delay (1 -

100)

Click Apply button.

The configured settings are saved and the actions which have been configured are performed in the appropriate circumstances.

248

iRMC

Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings

HP System Insight Manager (HP SIM) Integration Options

In this group you enable or disable HP SIM integration.

Figure 153: Page Server Management Information -

SIM Integration Enabled

Enables or disables HP SIM integration.

Click Apply to activate your settings.

System UUID Options

The System UUID Options group allows you to configure the format in which the iRMC device will return UUID information.

Figure 154: Page Server Management Information - System UUID Options

Get System UUID Response Format

Format in which the iRMC device will return UUID information.

IPMI Specification compatible

System GUID Response Format is compatible to the IPMI

Specification.

SMBIOS 2.6 Specification compatible

System GUID Response Format is compatible to the System

Management BIOS (SMBIOS) Reference Specification.

Click Apply to activate your settings.

iRMC S4

249

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

7.13 Network Settings -



Configure the LAN parameters

The Network Settings entry brings together the links to the pages you use to configure the LAN parameters of the iRMC:

–

"Network Interface Settings - Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC" on page 251

–

"Ports and Network Services - Configuring ports and network services" on page 258

–

"Proxy Settings - Configuring proxy settings" on page 262 .

–

"DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC" on page 264 .

–

"SNMP Generic Configuration" on page 268 .

250

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

7.13.1 Network Interface Settings -



Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC

The Network Interface page allows you to view and change the Ethernet settings for the iRMC.

Figure 155: Network Interface page iRMC S4

251

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

CAUTION!

Contact the network administrator responsible for the system before you change the Ethernet settings.

If you make illegal Ethernet settings for the iRMC, you will only be able to access the iRMC using special configuration software, the serial interface or via the BIOS.

Only users with the Configure iRMC S4 Settings permission are allowed to

edit Ethernet settings (see chapter "User management for the iRMC S4" on page 59 ).

Network Interface Settings

MAC Address

The MAC address of the iRMC is displayed here.

LAN Speed

This option is disabled/ not visible if network bonding is enabled.

LAN speed. The following options are available:

– Auto Negotiation

– 1000 MBit/s Full Duplex (depending on the server hardware)

– 100 MBit/s Full Duplex

– 100 MBit/s Half Duplex

– 10 MBit/s Full Duplex

– 10 MBit/s Half Duplex

If Auto Negotiation is selected, the onboard LAN controller assigned to the iRMC autonomously determines the correct transfer speed and duplex method for the network port it is connected to.

Max. Transmission Unit (MTU)

Maximum packet size (in bytes) of the TCP/IP data packages that will be accepted by the TCP/IP connection. (Default: 3000 Bytes).

252

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

LAN Port

This option is disabled / not visible if network bonding is enabled.

The LAN interface of the installed system NIC (network interface card) can be set up

– as shared LAN for shared operation with the system or

– as a service LAN for exclusive use as a management LAN.

Bonding Enabled

Enables / disables network bonding for the iRMC.

Network bonding for the iRMC is designed for redundancy in the event of

Ethernet network adapter failures. Thus, iRMC network management traffic is protected from loss of service which occurs due to failure of a single physical link.

The iRMC only supports the active-backup mode, i. e. one port is active until the link fails, then the other port takes over the MAC and becomes active.

If bonding is enabled, the Active Port the LAN Speed and LAN Port options are disabled / not visible.

For iRMC network bonding, the involved LAN switches should be located within the same network. Beyond that, iRMC network bonding does not require a special switch configuration.

Please note:

Even if enabled, Network bonding is suspended when the Front

LAN becomes active. The Front LAN port is activated and can be accessed by the predefined IP address 192.168.1.1. In the event this situation occurs, a corresponding note will be displayed in the web interface.

Bonding settings can nevertheless be configured and modified.

The settings will be effective once the front LAN is deactivated

(„link down"), i.e the bonding mode will be activated again depending on the currently configured bonding settings.

iRMC S4

253

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

The following figure outlines how network bonding works:

254

Figure 156: IP bonding enabled

1. Once bonding is activated, the currently used LAN port (here:

Management LAN) becomes the active port, which is now displayed in the Active Port field. The second LAN port (here: onboard shared

LAN) becomes the backup port.

2. If the currently active port (here: Management LAN) fails ("link down"), the second port (here: onboard shared LAN) becomes active.

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

Restrictions:

Blade servers do not support network bonding mode for the iRMC . They use an automatic failover mechanism between two shared LAN ports to ensure redundant network feature.

IPv4 Enabled

IPv4 addressing is always enabled for the iRMC and cannot be disabled.

IPv6 Enabled

Enables/disables IPv6 addressing for the iRMC. If IPv6 addressing is enabled, the IPv6 configuration group will be displayed (see below).

You cannot disable IPv6 addressing if the iRMC is currently accessed via

IPv6.

IPv4 configuration

The IPv4 configuration group allows you to configure the IPv4 settings for the iRMC.

IP Address

IPv4 address of the iRMC in the LAN. This address is different from the

IP address of the managed server.

If you are working with a static address (DHCP Enable option not activated) then you can enter this here. Otherwise (if the

DHCP Enable

option is activated), the iRMC only uses the field to display the address.

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask of the iRMC in the LAN.

Gateway

IPv4 address of the default gateway in the LAN.

DHCP Enabled

If you activate this option, the iRMC gets its LAN settings from a DHCP server on the network.

Do not activate the DHCP option if no DHCP server is available on the network.



If you activate the DHCP option and there is no DHCP server available on the network, the iRMC goes into a search loop (i.e. it continues searching for a DHCP server until it finds one).

iRMC S4

255

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

The (configured) iRMC can be registered with a DNS server by an

appropriately configured DHCP server (see section "DNS

Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC" on page 264 ).

IPv6 configuration

The IPv6 configuration group allows you to automatically or manually configure an IPv6 address for the iRMC:

Figure 157: Network Interface page - manual IPv6 configuration disabled

Manual IPv6 configuration

This option is disabled by default

If Manual IPv6 configuration is disabled, Stateless Autoconfiguration or

Stateful Address Configuration is used to automatically configure a routable IPv6 address for the iRMC:

– Stateless Autoconfiguration:

Stateless Autoconfiguration uses the Link Local Address, which is always assigned automatically to the iRMC, and enables the iRMC to generate its own IPv6 address.

– Stateful Address Configuration

With Stateful Address Configuration, the iRMC obtains its IPv6 address from a DHCP server.

256

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

If you enable the Manual IPv6 configuration option, the IPv6 configuration group displays additional parameters that allow you to manually configure a routable IPv6 address for the iRMC.

Figure 158: Network Interface page - manual IPv6 configuration

IPv6 Static Address

Static IPv6 address for the iRMC.

Prefix Length

Length of the IPv6 prefix.

IPv6 Static Gateway

Static IPv6 address of the default IPv6 gateway in the LAN.

VLAN Configuration

VLAN Enable

This option allows you to activate VLAN support for the iRMC.

VLAN Id

VLAN ID of the virtual network (VLAN) the iRMC belongs to. Permitted value range: 1 Î VLAN Id Î 4094.

VLAN Priority

VLAN priority (user priority) of the iRMC in the VLAN specified by VLAN



Permitted value range: 0 Î VLAN Priority Î 7 (default: 0).

iRMC S4

257

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

7.13.2 Ports and Network Services -



Configuring ports and network services

The Ports and Network Services page allows you to view and modify the configuration settings for ports and network services.

Figure 159: Ports and Network Services page

Configuration is not supported for ports where the input fields are deactivated in the iRMC web interface.

258

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

Ports for web-based access

Session Timeout

Period of inactivity (in seconds) after which the session is automatically closed. The login page of the iRMC web interface then appears, and you

can log in again as required (see page 122 ).

Your session will not automatically be closed if it is inactive when the time specified in Session Timeout has elapsed if you enter a value for the refresh interval which is less than the Session Timeout in the Refresh every ... seconds field.

HTTP Port

HTTP port of the iRMC



Default port number: 80



Configurable: yes



Enabled by default: yes



Communication direction: inbound and outbound

HTTPS Port

HTTPS (HTTP Secure) port of the iRMC



Default port number: 443



Configurable: yes



Enabled by default: yes



Communication direction: inbound and outbound

Force HTTPS

If you enable the Force HTTPS option, users can only establish a secure connection to the iRMC on the HTTPS port specified in the entry field.

If you disable the Force HTTPS option, users can establish a non-secure connection to the iRMC on the HTTP port specified in the entry field.

If the SSL certificate has expired, a message to this effect is issued in the browser.

Enable SSLv3

Allows an HTTPS session using SSL V3.

Enable TLS 1.0

Allows an HTTPS session using TLS V1.0.

Enable TLS 1.1

Allows an HTTPS session using TLS V1.1.

Enable TLS 1.2

Allows an HTTPS session using TLS V1.2.

iRMC S4

259

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

Enable Auto Refresh

If you activate this option, the contents of the iRMC web interface are automatically refreshed periodically. Specify the refresh interval in the

Refresh every ... seconds

field.

Reresh every ... seconds

Length (in seconds) of the interval for automatically refreshing the iRMC web interface.

If you enter a value for the refresh interval which is less than the

Session Timeout

(see page 259 ), your session will not automatically

be closed when the time specified in Session Timeout has elapsed in the event of inactivity.

Ports for text-based access

Telnet Port

Telnet port of the iRMC



Default port number: 3172



Configurable: yes



Enabled by default: no



Communication direction: inbound and outbound

Session Drop Time

Period of inactivity (in minutes) after which a Telnet / SSH connection is automatically cleared.

SSH Port

SSH (Secure Shell) port of the iRMC



Default port number: 22



Configurable: yes



Enabled by default: yes



Communication direction: inbound and outbound

Telnet Enabled

If you enable the Telnet Enabled option, users can establish a connection to the iRMC on the Telnet port specified in the corresponding entry field.

SSH Enabled

If you enable the SSH Enabled option, users can establish a connection to the iRMC on the SSH port specified in the corresponding entry field.

260

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

IPMI over LAN

“IPMI-over-LAN” is the specification of the LAN interface in the IPMI standard.

This specification stipulates how IPMI messages can be sent to or from the iRMC - encapsuCIM lated in RMCP (Remote Management Control Protocol) data packets. These

RMCP data packets are transferred via an Ethernet LAN connection using UDP under IPv4 or IPv6.

RCMP supports the management of system statuses in systems without running operating system.

The interface for such a connection is provided on the integrated LAN controller of the iRMC.

IPMI over LAN enabled

This option is enabled by default.



Allows you to disable the IPMI over LAN feature.

CIM

The Common Information Model (CIM) is a standardized, hierarchical, objectoriented data model which ensures a uniform representation of the managed resources.

CIM enabled

This option is enabled by default.



Allows you to disable the CIM protocol.

Ê Click Apply to store the configured settings. iRMC S4

261

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

7.13.3 Proxy Settings - Configuring proxy settings

The Proxy Settings page allows you to configure the settings for a proxy server which can be optionally used for establishing the connection to an update

repository (see section "Update Settings - Configuring general eLCM update settings" on page 340

) and/or for establishing an AIS Connect connection (see

section "AIS Connect - Configuring and using AIS Connect" on page 142

Figure 160: Proxy Settings page

Proxy Server

IP address of the Proxy server

You can activate the Domain Name System (DNS) for the iRMC

(see "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC" on page 264

). You can then use a symbolic name instead of the IP address.

Proxy Port

Port of the proxy service.



Default port number: 81

262

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

Proxy User

User name for authentication on the proxy server.

Password

Password for authentication on the proxy server.

Confirm Password

Confirm the password entered.

Click Apply to activate your settings. iRMC S4

263

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

7.13.4 DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC

The DNS Configuration page allows you to activate the Domain Name System

(DNS) for the iRMC and to configure a host name for the iRMC.

Figure 161: DNS Configuration page

264

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

DNS Settings

The DNS Settings group allows you to activate the Domain Name System (DNS) for the iRMC. This makes it possible to use symbolic DNS names instead of IP addresses for configuring the iRMC.

Figure 162: DNS Configuration page - DNS Settings

DNS Enabled

Enables/disables DNS for the iRMC.

Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP

If you activate this option, the IP addresses of the DNS servers are obtained automatically from the DHCP server.



In this event, up to three DNS servers are supported.

If you do not enable this setting, you can enter up to three DNS server addresses manually under DNS-Server 1 - DNS-Server 3.

DNS Domain

If the option Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP is disabled, specify the name of the default domain for requests to the DNS server(s).

DNS Search Path

List of (partially qualified) domain names, separated by one or more space characters. The DNS search list can have a maximum length of

256 characters. The DNS Search Path field is used to specify the domains to be searched when looking up a host name that does not have a domain-name component.

DNS Server 1 .. 3

If the Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP option is disabled, you can enter the names of up to five DNS servers here.

iRMC S4

265

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

DNS Retries

Number of DNS retries.

DNS Timeout

Timeout (in seconds) for a DNS response.

Ê Click Apply to store the configured settings.

DNS Name

The DNS Name group allows you to configure a host name for the iRMC and thus use “dynamic DNS”. Dynamic DNS allows DHCP servers to autonomously pass on the IP address and system name of a network component to DNS servers to facilitate identification.

Figure 163: DNS Configuration page - DNS Name

Register DHCP Address in DNS via DHCP Server

This option is disabled if IPv6 addressing is used.



Enables/disables the transfer of the DHCP name to the DHCP server for the iRMC and the DNS registration via DHCP server.

Register full domain name (FQDN) via DHCP server in DNS

This option is disabled if IPv6 addressing is used.



Enables/disables the transfer of the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain

Name) to the DHCP server for the iRMC and the DNS registration via

DHCP server.

DNS Update Enabled

Enables/disables update of DNS records via Dynamic DNS.

Only insecure DNS is supported.

266

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

Use iRMC S4 name instead of server hostname

The iRMC name specified in the iRMC S4 Name entry field is used for the iRMC instead of the server name.

Add Serial Number

The last 3 bytes of the MAC address of the iRMC are appended to the

DHCP name of the iRMC.

Add Extension

The extension specified in the Extension entry field is appended to the

DHCP name of the iRMC.

iRMC S4 name

iRMC name passed to DHCP for the iRMC in place of the server name.

Depending on the related options, the iRMC name is used as part of the

DNS name.

Extension

Name extension for the iRMC.

DNS name

Shows the configured DNS name for the iRMC.

Ê Click Apply to store the configured settings. iRMC S4

267

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

7.13.5 SNMP Generic Configuration

The SNMP Generic Configuration page allows you to configure an SNMP service on the iRMC which supports SNMP v1/v2c and SNMPv3 on the following SNMP

MIBs:

– SNMP MIB-2

– SNMP STATUS.MIB

– SNMP OS.MIB

– SNMP SC2.MIB

– SNMP RAID.MIB

When the SNMP service is enabled, information provided by these MIBs can be used by any system running an SNMP Manager.

SNMPv3 provides a higher level of security than SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.

Figure 164: SNMP Configuration page

SNMP Enabled

Enables SNMP service on the iRMC.

SNMP Port

Port on which the SNMP service is listening (normally UDP 161).

268

iRMC

Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters

SNMP Protocol

SNMP protocol version to be used. For each user, you can configure if a user is allowed to use SNMP, see

section "iRMC S4 User - local user management on the iRMC" on page 280

All (SNMPv1/v2c/v3)

The SNMP service is available for all SNMP protocol versions

(SNMP v1/v2c/v3).

SNMPv3 only

Only SNMPv3 is available.

The following two options are only displayed if All (SNMPv1/v2c/v3) has been selected under SNMP Protocol.

SNMPv1/v2c Community

Community string in case of SNMP v1/v2c.

The community string may contain the following characters:

A-Z,a-z,0-9(*/:,_?=-@&)%!

Space characters and \ are not allowed.

In SNMP terminology, a "community" denotes a group comprising one or more management platforms. Every community is identified by a community string. The community string is a non-encrypted component of every SNMP request and identifies the sender of the request as a member of the community concerned. Thus, authorization for a SNMP

GET request is controlled with this community string. The community string makes a simple authentication mechanism available in SNMP.

Since the community string is sent in non-encrypted form with the

SNMP message, it is always at a risk of being used without authorization. This can be problematic for using SNMP with security in mind. On the other hand, most communities use the preset community string "public" in any case.

SNMPv1/v2c Permission

Permission for the SNMP community. Currently, only "read only" is supported (fixed preset value).

Click Apply to store the configured settings. iRMC S4

269

Alerting - Configure alerting

7.14 Alerting - Configure alerting

The Alerting entry contains the links to the pages you use to configure alerting for the iRMC:

–

"SNMP Trap Alerting - Configure SNMP trap alerting" on page 271 .

–

"Email Alerting - Configure email alerting" on page 273

270

iRMC

Alerting - Configure alerting

7.14.1 SNMP Trap Alerting -



Configure SNMP trap alerting

The SNMP Trap Alerting page allows you to view and configure the settings for

SNMP trap alerting.

Traps are sent regardless if SNMP is enabled or not. They are sent via net-snmp interface to support SNMPv1 / V2c and SNMPv3 traps.

Forwarding of SNMP traps to up to seven SNMP servers is supported.

For each user, you can configure if a user is allowed to use SNMP, see

section

"iRMC S4 User - local user management on the iRMC" on page 280

Figure 165: SNMP Trap Alerting page

SNMP Community

Name of the SNMP community.

Ê Click Apply to accept the community name.

SNMP user

Preconfigured SNMPv3 user for SNMPv3 trap destination iRMC S4

271

Alerting - Configure alerting

engineID

The engineID is used for sending SNMPv3 traps. The engineID can be changed in compliance with RFC3411. The ID needs to be unique across the set of communicating SNMPv3 Agents and Managers. The rules for an engineID are as follows:

– It must be at least five octets in length and may not be longer than 32 octets. Each octet can contain a value from 0 up to 255

(Hexadecimal: 0x00 up to 0xff).

– An SNMP engineID must not be set to all 0s or 255s (Hexadecimal:

0xff).

– If an engineID starts with a 0 it must be 12 octets long.

– For each engineID there must be a createUser directive in the SNMP trap receiver configuration.

SNMP Server1 .. SNMP Server7

(trap destinations)

DNS names or IP addresses of the servers that belong to this community and are to be configured as Trap Destinations. SNMP protocol version to be used for receiving traps.

Ê Click Apply to activate the SNMP server as a trap destination.

Click Test to test the connection to the SNMP server.

Click Apply All to activate all the settings if appropriate.

272

iRMC

Alerting - Configure alerting

7.14.2 Email Alerting - Configure email alerting

The Email Alerting page allows you to configure the settings for

 email alerting.

Configuration of two mail servers is supported.

Email alerting can be specified individually for each user (see section

"User “<name>” Configuration - User configuration (details)" on page 283

Figure 166: Email Alerting page iRMC S4

273

Alerting - Configure alerting

Global Email Paging Configuration - Configure global email settings

The Global Email Paging Configuration group allows you to configure the global email settings.

Figure 167: Email Alerting page, Global Email Configuration

Email Alerting Enable

Activate this option.

SMTP Retries (0 - 7)

Number of SMTP retries.

SMTP Retry Delay (0 - 255)

Time (in seconds) between SMTP retries.

SMTP Response Timeout

Timeout (in seconds) for an SMTP response.

Click Apply to activate your settings.

Primary SMTP Server Configuration - Configure primary mail server

The Primary SMTP Server Configuration group allows you to configure the primary server (SMTP server).

Figure 168: Email Alerting page, Primary SMTP Server Configuration

274

iRMC

Alerting - Configure alerting

SMTP Server

IP address of the primary mail server

You can activate the Domain Name System (DNS) for the iRMC

(see "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC" on page 264 ). You can then use a symbolic name instead of the IP

address.

SMTP Port

SMTP port of the mail server

Auth Type

Authentication type for connecting the iRMC to the mail server:

–

None



No authentication for the connection.

–

SMTP AUTH (RFC 2554)



Authentication according to RFC 2554: SMTP Service Extension for

Authentication.

In this case, the following information is required:

Auth User Name

User name for authentication on the mail server

Auth Password

Password for authentication on the mail server

Confirm Password

Confirm the password entered.

Send FQDN with EHLO/HELO

Enables/disables sending the FDQN with EHLO/HELO.

Secure (SSL)

Depending on the configured network port the iRMC will directly establish an SSL connection (SMTPS legacy port 465) or check for the presence of the STARTTLS keyword (any other configured network port):

– If STARTTLS is present in the response from the SMTP server the iRMC switches to TLS on the existing network connection.

– If STARTTLS is not present, the mail will be sent unencrypted over the existing connection.

Email is sent SSL encrypted. iRMC S4

275

Alerting - Configure alerting

Verify SSL Certificate

The SSL certificate from the SMTP server is verified against the stored

CA certificate in the iRMC (e.g. the SMTP server certificate has to be issued/signed by this CA).

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

Secondary SMTP Server Configuration - Configure secondary mail server

The Secondary SMTP Server Configuration group allows you to configure the secondary server (SMTP server).

Figure 169: Email Alerting page - Secondary SMTP Server Configuration

SMTP Server

IP address of the secondary mail server

You can activate the Domain Name System (DNS) for the iRMC

(see "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC" on page 264

). You can then use a symbolic name instead of the IP address.

SMTP Port

SMTP port of the mail server

Auth Type

Authentication type for connecting the iRMC to the mail server:

–

None



No authentication for the connection.

–

SMTP AUTH (RFC 2554)



Authentication according to RFC 2554: SMTP Service Extension for

Authentication.

In this case, the following information is required:

276

iRMC

Alerting - Configure alerting

Auth User Name

User name for authentication on the mail server

Auth Password

Password for authentication on the mail server

Confirm Password

Confirm the password entered.

Send FQDN with EHLO/HELO

Enables/disables sending the FDQN with EHLO/HELO.

Secure (SSL)

Email is sent SSL encrypted.

Verify SSL Certificate

SSL certificate is verified.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings. iRMC S4

277

Alerting - Configure alerting

Mail Format dependent Configuration -



Configure mail-format-dependent settings

The Mail Format dependent Configuration group allows you to configure the mailformat-dependent settings. You specify the mail format for each user using the

New User Configuration

- User <Name> Configuration - Email Format Configuration

page (see page 291

The following email formats are supported:

– Standard

– Fixed Subject

– ITS-Format

– SMS-Format

Figure 170: Email Alerting page, Mail Format dependent Configuration

Some entry fields are disabled depending on the mail format.

From

Sender identification iRMC.



Active for all mail formats.

If the string entered here contains an “@”, the string is interpreted as a valid email address. Otherwise, “admin@<ip-address>” is used as the valid email address.

Subject

Fixed subject for the alert mails.



Only active for the Fixed Subject mail format (see page 291 ).

Message

Type of message (email).



Only active for the Fixed Subject mail format (see page 291 ).

278

iRMC

Alerting - Configure alerting

Admin Name

Name of the administrator responsible (optional).



Only active for the ITS mail format (see page 291 ).

Admin Phone

Phone number of the administrator responsible (optional).



Only active for the ITS mail format (see page 291 ).

Country Code

Two characters country code based on ISO 3166, ISO 3166 alpha 2.

Customer Id

Identifier for the customer.

Server URL

A URL under which the server is accessible under certain conditions. You have to enter the URL manually.



Only active for the Standard mail format.

Attach Screenshot to 'Critical O/S Stop' event email

A screenshot generated automatically by the iRMC in case of a critical

OS stop event is attached to the corresponding 'Critical O/S Stop' event email.

The generation of the screenshot may fail for various reasons (e.g. unsupported graphic mode). Thus, if no screenshot is available within 45 seconds at most, the email is sent without attachment.

Ê Click Apply to store your settings.

iRMC S4

279

User Management

7.15 User Management

The User Management entry contains the links to the pages for local user management as well as for the configuration of the directory service for global user management (LDAP configuration):

–

"iRMC S4 User - local user management on the iRMC" on page 280 .

–

"Directory Service Configuration (LDAP) - Configuring the directory service at the iRMC" on page 294

–

"Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) Configuration - Configuring the

CAS Service" on page 313

7.15.1 iRMC S4 User - local user management on the iRMC

The iRMC S4 User page contains a table showing all the configured users: Each line contains the data for one configured user. The user names are implemented in the form of links. Clicking on a user name opens the



User “<name>” Configuration

window (see

page 283

), in which you can view or modify the settings for this user.

User ID 1 (“null user”) is reserved for the standard and is therefore unavailable for user management on the iRMC.

280

iRMC

User Management

Figure 171: User Management page

Delete

The table of configured users includes a Delete button after each user entry. Click this button to delete the associated user after confirming this choice.

New User

When you click this button, the



New User Configuration

page opens (see

page 282

). You can configure a new user here.

iRMC S4

281

User Management

7.15.1.1 New User Configuration - Configuring a new user

The New User Configuration page allows you to configure the basic settings for a new user.

You will find explanations of the fields and selection lists on the

New User Configuration

page as of

page 284

under the description of the User

“<name>” Configuration

page.

figure 172 you can see the configuration of a user with the name “User5”.

Figure 172: User Management - New User Configuration page

282

iRMC

User Management

7.15.1.2 User “<name>” Configuration - User configuration (details)

The User “<name>” Configuration page allows you to view, modify and extend the settings for a user.

In figure 173

you can see the configuration of the user created in

figure 172 .

The user ID is shown in brackets after the user name.

Figure 173: User Management - User “<name>” iRMC S4

283

User Management iRMC S4 User Information - Configuring user access data

The iRMC S4 User Information group allows you to configure the access data for the user.

Figure 174: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, User Information

Name

Enter the name of the user.

A valid user name must start with a letter. The remaining part of the name may only contain letters, digits, underscores, dashes, periods, and "at" signs (@).

Blank characters are not allowed.

User names must be unique. Duplicate user names are not allowed.

Password

Enter the user password.

Enabling SNMPv3 for the user requires that the password configured for the user has a minimum length of 8 characters.

Confirm Password

Confirm the password by entering it again here.

Description

Enter a general description of the configured user here.

Click Apply to activate your settings.

284

iRMC

User Management

IPMI Privileges / Permissions - Assigning user privileges

The IPMI Privileges / Permissions group allows you to configure the channelspecific user privileges.

Figure 175: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, Privilege / Permissions

IPMI User Enabled

If this option is disabled, the user will not be able to log on to the iRMC.

LAN Channel Privilege

Assign a privilege group for a LAN channel to the user here:

–

User

–

Operator

–

Administrator

–

OEM

Refer to

section "User permissions" on page 62 for information on the

permissions associated with the privilege groups.

Serial Channel Privilege

Assign a privilege group for a serial channel to the user here: The same privilege groups are available as for LAN Channel Privilege.

iRMC S4

285

User Management

In addition to the channel-specific permissions, you can also individually assign users the following channel-independent permissions:

Configure User Accounts

Permission to configure local user access data.

Configure iRMC S4 Settings

Permission to configure the iRMC settings.

Video Redirection Enabled

Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) in “View Only” and

“Full Control” mode.

Remote Storage Enabled

Permission to use the Remote Storage functionality.

User Shell (Text Access)

Select the desired user shell here.



The following options are available:

–

SMASH CLP



See

section "Start a Command Line shell... - Start a SMASH CLP shell" on page 380 .

–

Remote Manager



See

chapter "iRMC S4 via Telnet/SSH (Remote Manager)" on page 359 .

–

None

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

286

iRMC

User Management

SNMPv3 configuration

The SNMPv3 configuration group allows you to configure the iRMC user for

SNMPv3. Compared to SNMPv1/v2c, SNMPv3 provides a higher level of security by authenticating and encrypting the SNMP packets.

The parameters of the SNMPv3 configuration group are disabled (grayed out) if the SNMP enabled option in the SNMP Configuration page is disabled

(see section "SNMP Generic Configuration" on page 268

Enabling SNMPv3 for the user requires that the password configured for this user has a minimum length of 8 characters.

Although the SNMPv3 standard allows you to configure SNMPv3

"without authentication and without encryption (noAuthNoPriv)" or "with authentication but without encryption (authNoPriv)", the

SNMPv3 configuration

group only allows you to configure "with authentication and with encryption (authPriv)" for security reasons (see below).

Figure 176: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, SNMPv3 configuration

SNMPv3 enabled

Enables SNMPv3 support for the user.

Access privilege

Access privilege of the user. Currently, readonly is fixed preset.

Authentication

Select the authentication protocol that SNMPv3 uses for authentication.

SHA

Secure hash algorithm (SHA) is used for authentication.

MD5

Message-Digest Algorithm 5 (MD5) is used for authentication.

iRMC S4

287

User Management

Privacy

Select the privacy protocol that SNMPv3 uses for encrypting the

SNMPv3 traffic.

DES

Digital Encryption Standard is used for encrypting the SNMPv3 traffic.

AES

Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128-bit encryption is used for encrypting the SNMPv3 traffic.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

User SSHv2 public key upload from file

The User SSHv2 public Key upload from file group allows you to load a user SSHv2 public key from a local file.

Figure 177: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, User SSHv2 public key

upload from file

Browse...

Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the file containing the

SSHv2 public key.

Upload

Loads the SSHv2 public key specified in the input field onto the iRMC.

For further details on SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC users see

section "SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC S4 users" on page 66

288

iRMC

User Management

S/MIME Certificate

The S/MIME certificate upload from file group allows you to load an S/MIME certificate from a local file.

In conjunction with S/MIME, the iRMC only supports encryption. Signing is not supported.

Figure 178: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, S/MIME certificate upload

from file

Browse...

Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the file containing the

SSHv2 public key.

Upload

Uploads the selected S/MIME certificate.

After the S/MIME certificate has been uploaded, the S/MIME certificate upload

from file

group is displayed as follows:

Figure 179: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, S/MIME certificate

has been uploaded from file iRMC S4

289

User Management

View Certificate

Displays the S/MIME certificate until the next refresh cycle or manual refresh of the iRMC web interface.

Figure 180: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, S/MIME certificate - View Certificate

Delete

Deletes the S/MIME certificate from the iRMC.

290

iRMC

User Management

Email Configuration - Configure user-specific email settings

The Email Configuration group allows you to configure the user-specific settings governing the email format.

Figure 181: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, Email Configuration

Email Enabled

Specify whether the user is to be informed about system statuses by email.

Encrypted

Specify whether emails should be encrypted with S/MIME.

Mail Format

Depending on the selected email format, you can make a number of settings in the Email Alerting - Mail Format dependent Configuration group

(see page 278 ).

The following email formats are available:

–

Standard

–

Fixed Subject

–

ITS-Format

–

SMS-Format

Only generating emails with 160 characters maximum length,

SMS-Format

is the preferred email to SMS gateways solution. iRMC S4

291

User Management

Preferred Mail Server

Select the preferred mail server.



You can choose one of the following options:

–

Automatic

If the email cannot be sent successfully immediately, for instance because the preferred mail server is not available, the email is sent to the second mail server.

–

Primary

Only the mail server which has been configured as the primary SMTP server (see

page 274

) is used as the preferred mail server.

–

Secondary

Only the mail server which has been configured as the secondary

SMTP server (see page 276 ) is used as the preferred mail server.

Errors sending email are recorded in the event log.



Email Address

Email address of recipient.

Use extra SMS Email Subjects

Only displayed if Mail Format: SMS-Format is enabled.

If enabled, an SMS gateway provider specific email subject is used.

SMS Email Subject

(Only if Mail Format: SMS-Format is enabled)

SMS gateway provider-specific Email subject.

292

iRMC

User Management

Paging Severity Configuration

Here you can configure system events about which an iRMC user is to be informed by email.

Every entry in the event log for the iRMC is assigned to a particular paging group.

The following settings are available for each event group:

None

The notification function is deactivated for this paging group.

Critical

The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as CRITICAL.

Warning

The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as Minor or Major or Critical.

All

The iRMC notifies users of every event in this group which causes an entry to be made in the system event log.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

iRMC S4

293

User Management

7.15.2 Directory Service Configuration (LDAP) -



Configuring the directory service at the iRMC

In order to perform global user management via a directory service (see the

"User Management in ServerView" manual), you must configure the iRMC appropriately in the Directory Service Configuration page.

Currently, support for iRMC LDAP access is provided for the following directory services: Microsoft Active Directory, Novell eDirectory and

Open LDAP.

The following characters are reserved as metacharacters for search strings in LDAP: *, \, &, |,!, =, <, >, ~,:

You must therefore not use these characters as components of Relative

Distinguished Names (RDN).

Figure 182: Directory Service Configuration page (LDAP configuration)

294

iRMC

User Management

LDAP Enabled

This option specifies whether the iRMC can access a directory service via LDAP. Directory service access via LDAP is only possible if LDAP

Enable

has been activated.

If LDAP Enable is checked then the login information (see

page 122 ) is always transferred with SSL encryption between the

web browser and the iRMC.

LDAP SSL Enabled

If you check this option then data transfer between iRMC and the directory server is SSL encrypted.

LDAP SSL Enable has no influence on whether or not the iRMC web interface pages are SSL-protected on opening.

You should only activate LDAP SSL Enable if a domain controller certificate is installed.

Disable Local Login

If you activate this option then all the local iRMC user identifications are locked and only the user identifications managed by the directory service are valid.

CAUTION!

If the option Disable Local Login is activated and the connection to the directory service fails then it is no longer possible to log in at the iRMC.

Always use SSL Login

This option is only relevant if LDAP is deactivated.



If you activate this option then the HTTP SSL-secured login page is always used even if LDAP is deactivated. Only if you do not activate

Always use SSL Login

and LDAP is deactivated is a mask secured via

Digest Authentication Login used.

iRMC S4

295

User Management

Directory Server Type

Type of directory server used:

The following directory services are supported:

–

Active Directory

: Microsoft Active Directory

–

Novell

: Novell eDirectory

–

OpenLDAP

: OpenLDAP

–

Open DS /Open DJ

/ Apache DS

Authorization Type

Authorization type used.

ServerView LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on LDAP Server

ServerView-specific LDAP groups with authorization settings in the SVS structure on the LDAP server are used to determine user permissions (see manual "User Management in ServerView").

Standard LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on iRMC

No ServerView-specific SVS structure on the LDAP server is used.

Instead, user authentication is checked by means of the standard

LDAP group the user belongs to. iRMC-specific user permissions for this standard LDAP group must be configured locally on the iRMC. For this the Directory Service User Group Information group

is displayed (see section "Standard LDAP groups with authorization settings on the iRMC S4" on page 297

This method supports group nesting. Therefore, all iRMC specific user permissions which you assign to a standard

LDAP group are automatically inherited by its nested groups.

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

Different input fields are provided, depending on the directory service you select:

– For Active Directory, refer to

section "Configuring iRMC for Microsoft

Active Directory" on page 302

–

For eDirectory, Open LDAP and OpenDS DJ, refer to section "Configuring iRMC for Novell eDirectory / OpenLDAP / OpenDS / Open DJ" on page 307 .

296

iRMC

User Management

7.15.2.1 Standard LDAP groups with authorization settings on the iRMC S4

If Standard LDAP Groups with Authorization Settings on iRMC has been enabled in the Directory Service Configuration page, some additional settings are required which allow you to administer LDAP groups on the iRMC. These LDAP groups are used to define iRMC privileges and permissions for users who belong to standard LDAP groups on the directory server.

Figure 183: Microsoft Active Directory: Directory Service User Group Information

Delete

Deletes the corresponding user group information.

New Group

Opens the New LDAP User Group group which allows you to define a new

LDAP group the iRMC permissions for a new LDAP group:

Figure 184: Microsoft Active Directory: New LDAP User Group

LDAP User Group Name

Name of the new LDAP user group iRMC S4

297

User Management

User Shell (Text Access)

Select the desired user shell here.



The following options are available:

–

SMASH CLP



See section "Start a Command Line shell... - Start a SMASH

CLP shell" on page 380

–

Remote Manager



See chapter "iRMC S4 via Telnet/SSH (Remote Manager)" on page 359

–

None

LAN Channel Privilege

Assign a privilege group for a LAN channel to the user here:

–

User

–

Operator

–

Administrator

–

OEM

Refer to section "User permissions" on page 62

for information on the permissions associated with the privilege groups.

Serial Channel Privilege

Assign a privilege group for a serial channel to the user here: The same privilege groups are available as for LAN Channel Privilege.

Configure User Accounts

Permission to configure local user access data.

Configure iRMC S4 Settings

Permission to configure the iRMC settings.

Video Redirection Enabled

Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) in “View

Only” and “Full Control” mode.

Remote Storage Enabled

Permission to use the Virtual Media functionality.

298

iRMC

User Management

<Name>

Clicking a link in the Name column opens a new page allowing you to modify and/or supplement the configuration settings of the corresponding LDAP user group:

Figure 185: Microsoft Active Directory: Directory Service User Group Information iRMC S4

299

User Management

The Options of LDAP User Group Information and Privileges and

Permissions for LDAP User Group

are as described under the New Group option (see

page 297

The options of Email Configuration for LDAP User Group are as follows:

300

Figure 186: Microsoft Active Directory: Directory Service User Group Information

Email Enabled

Specify whether the user is to be informed about system statuses by email.

Mail Format

Depending on the selected email format, you can make a number of settings in the Email Alerting - Mail Format dependent

Configuration group

(see page 278 ).

The following email formats are available:

–

Fixed Subject

–

ITS-Format

–

SMS-Format

iRMC

iRMC S4

User Management

Preferred Mail Server

Select the preferred mail server.



You can choose one of the following options:

–

Automatic

If the email cannot be sent successfully immediately, for instance because the preferred mail server is not available, the email is sent to the second mail server.

–

Primary

Only the mail server which has been configured as the primary

SMTP server (see page 274 ) is used as the preferred mail

server.

–

Secondary

Only the mail server which has been configured as the

secondary SMTP server (see page 276 ) is used as the

preferred mail server.

Errors sending email are recorded in the event log.

Email Address

Email address of recipient.

Email address must be configured for the user in the LDAP directory.

Paging Severity Configuration

Here you can configure system events about which an iRMC user is to be informed by email. Every entry in the event log for the iRMC is assigned to a particular paging group.

The following settings are available for each event group:

–

None

The notification function is deactivated for this paging group.

–

Critical

The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as CRITICAL.

–

Warning

The iRMC notifies users by email if an entry in the system event log is reported as Minor or Major or Critical.

301

User Management

–

All

The iRMC notifies users of every event in this group which causes an entry to be made in the system event log.

Click Apply to activate your settings.

7.15.2.2 Configuring iRMC for Microsoft Active Directory

After you have confirmed the Active Directory you have chosen by clicking Apply, the following variant of the Directory Service Configuration page is shown:

Figure 187: Directory Service Configuration: Specifications for Microsoft Active Directory

The entries shown as examples in figure 187

refer to the examples and figures shown in the "User Management in ServerView" manual.

302

iRMC

User Management

Proceed as follows:

Ê Complete your specifications in the Global Directory Service Configuration group:

Figure 188: Global Directory Service Configuration: Specifications for Microsoft Active

7.15.3 Centralized Authentication Service (CAS)

Configuration - Configuring the CAS Service

This view is not supported by all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC.

SSO is only supported for accessing the iRMC via the web interface.

SSO is not supported for accessing the iRMC via the Remote Manager

(Telnet/SSH).

The Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) Configuration page allows you to configure the iRMC web interface for CAS-based single sign-on (SSO) authentication.

The first time a user logs in to an application within the SSO domain of the CAS service, they are prompted for their credentials by the CAS-specific login screen. Once they have been successfully authenticated by the CAS service, the user is granted access to the iRMC web interface as well as to any other service within the SSO domain without being prompted for login credentials again.

Figure 201: Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) Configuration iRMC S4

313

User Management

CAS Generic Configuration

The CAS Generic Configuration group allows you to configure CAS access data.

Figure 202: CAS Generic Configuration

CAS Enabled

Enables SSO using the CAS service that you specify in the

CAS Generic Configuration

group.

Enable SSL/HTTPS

All communication between the CAS service and the iRMC is SSL encrypted.

Verify SSL Certificate

The SSL Certificate of the CAS service is checked against the CA

Certificate.

314

iRMC

User Management

Always Display Login Page

If Always Display Login Page is disabled and the CAS service cannot be reached, type /login after the IP address of the iRMC in your browser’s navigation bar.

Always displays the iRMC login page:

Figure 203: Login page

Figure 204: Login page - explicit authentication required

This allows users to temporarily login at the iRMC with privileges and permissions that differ from the authorization profile defined under

CAS User Privilege and Permissions

(see

page 317

A user may, for instance, currently be logged in to the CAS service under a user ID with the User privilege and now wants to perform an action requiring the Administrator privilege. The user can temporarily login at the iRMC under a user ID with the required privileges. However, the user cannot switch between both user IDs.

The buttons iRMC Login and CAS Login work as follows:

iRMC S4 Login

Logs the user in to the iRMC web interface with the values specified for User name and Password. The CAS service is bypassed. iRMC S4

315

User Management

CAS Login

Logs the user in to the iRMC web interface via SSO:

– If the user has not been authenticated by the CAS service yet:



The user is redirected to the CAS service for authentication with the specified values for User name and Password.

– If the user has already been authenticated by the CAS service:



The user is logged in at the iRMC without being prompted for user name and password.

CAS Network Port

Port of the CAS service.



Default port number: 3170

CAS Server

DNS name of the CAS service.

It is absolutely necessary that all systems participating in the SSO domain reference the Central Management Station (CMS) via the same addressing representation. (An SSO Domain comprises all systems where authentication is performed using the same CAS service.) Thus, for example, if you have installed the ServerView

Operations Manager by using the name "my-cms.my-domain", you must specify exactly the same name for configuring the CAS service for an iRMC. If, instead, you specify only "my-cms" or another IP address of my-cms, SSO will not be enabled between the two systems.

CAS LoginURL

CAS Logout URL

Logout URL of the CAS service.

CAS Validate URL

Validate URL of the CAS service.

Assign permissions from

Defines the iRMC privilege and permissions for users who are logged in to the iRMC via SSO:

Local assigned permissions

The privilege and permissions defined under CAS User Privileg and

Permissions

apply to the user.

316

iRMC

User Management

Permissions retrieved via LDAP

The authorization profile defined in the LDAP directory service applies to the user.

The Permissions retrieved via LDAP option is only available, if LDAP

is enabled (see option "LDAP Enabled" on page 295

CAS User Privilege and Permissions

The CAS User Privilege and Permissions group allows you to define the iRMC privileges and permissions a user is granted if they are logged in at the iRMC via SSO.

The CAS User Privilege and Permissions group is not displayed if you have selected Permissions retrieved via LDAP under Permissions assigned from in the CAS Generic Configuration group.

Figure 205: CAS User Privilege and Permissions

Privilege

Assign a privilege group to the user here:

–

User

–

Operator

–

Administrator

–

OEM

Refer to

section "User permissions" on page 62 for information on the

permissions associated with the privilege groups.

In addition to the IPMI specific permissions, you can also individually assign users the following channel-independent permissions:

Configure User Accounts

Permission to configure local user access data.

iRMC S4

317

User Management

Configure iRMC S4 Settings

Permission to configure the iRMC settings.

Video Redirection Enabled

Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) in “View Only” and

“Full Control” mode.

Remote Storage Enabled

Permission to use the Virtual Media functionality.

318

iRMC

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

7.16 Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

The following pages are available for console redirection:

–

"BIOS Text Console - Configure and start text console redirection" on page 319 .

–

"Advanced Video Redirection - Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" on page 324 .

7.16.1 BIOS Text Console -



Configure and start text console redirection

The BIOS Text Console page allows you to configure and start text console redirection.

Text console redirection can also be configured in the BIOS (see section

"Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S4" on page 49 ).

Figure 206: BIOS Text Console page iRMC S4

319

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

7.16.1.1 BIOS Console Redirection Options -



Configure text console redirection

BIOS Console Redirection Options

allows you to configure text console redirection.

Figure 207: BIOS Text Console page - BIOS Console Redirection Options

Console Redirection Enabled

This option allows you to enable / disable console redirection.

The operating system can also permit text console redirection irrespective of the settings in the BIOS.

Serial Port Baudrate

The following baud rates can be set: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,

38400, 57600, 115200.

Serial Port Flow Control

The following settings are possible:

None

Flow control is disabled.

XON/XOFF (Software)

Flow control is handled by the software.

CTS/RTS (Hardware)

Flow control is handled by the hardware.

Terminal Emulation

The following terminal emulations are available:

VT100 7Bit, VT100 8Bit

, PC-ANSI 7Bit, PC-ANSI 8 Bit, VT100+, VT-UTF8

320

iRMC

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Serial 1 Multiplexer

Check the consistency of the multiplexer settings:

– Serial: System

– LAN: iRMC

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

iRMC S4

321

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

7.16.1.2 Text console redirection while the operating system is running

Depending on the operating system used on the managed server, you can continue to use console redirection after the BIOS / UEFI POST phase.

DOS

Condition:

The BIOS setting for console redirection mode must be set to Enhanced

(see the section

"BIOS Text Console - Configure and start text console redirection" on page 319 ).

If the managed server starts the PRIMERGY ServerView Suite diagnosis software, you can operate PRIMERGY ServerView Suite diagnosis using console redirection.

Windows Server 2008 / 2012

Windows Server 2008 / 2012 handles console redirection automatically after the

POST phase. No further settings are necessary. While the operating system is booting, the Windows Server 2008 SAC console / Windows Server 2012 SAC console is transferred:

Figure 208: Windows Server SAC console

Linux

You must configure a Linux operating system in such a way that it handles console redirection after the POST phase. Once it has been configured, you have complete remote access.

322

iRMC

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Settings required

The settings may differ between program versions.

SuSe and RedHat

Add the following line to the end of the file /etc/inittab: xx:12345:respawn:/sbin/agetty <baud-rate> ttyS0

RedHat

Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /etc/grub.conf: console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0

SuSE

Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /boot/grub/menu.lst: console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0 iRMC S4

323

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

7.16.2 Advanced Video Redirection -



Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)

The Advanced Video Redirection page allows you to start graphical console redirection. The “Advanced Video Redirection” feature redirects graphical output from the managed server to the remote workstation and assigns keyboard and mouse input from the remote workstation to the managed server so that you can access the managed server from the remote workstation as if you were working locally.

AVR can be used by two users simultaneously. One user has full control over the server (full-control mode) and the other can only passively observe keyboard and mouse operation of the server (view-only mode).

In order to use the iRMC function Advanced Video Redirection, you require a license key (see

section "iRMC S4 Information - Information on the iRMC" on page 174

The AVR functionality is made available with a Java applet or via HTML5.

Important note:

Java caching must not be disabled. Otherwise AVR cannot be started.

(Java caching is enabled per default).

Figure 209: Advanced Video Redirection page

324

iRMC

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Creating an ASR screenshot

The ASR Screenshot page allows you to

– take a screenshot of the current VGA screen on the managed server (video screenshot) and store it in the firmware of the iRMC,

– view the screenshot stored in the iRMC firmware,

– delete the screenshot stored in the iRMC firmware,

Figure 210: Creating an video screenshot

A video screenshot is automatically created in case of a SEL entry for

"OS critical stop“.

A maximum of one video screenshot is stored in the firmware of the iRMC, namely the most recently created screenshot.

The following actions are available by clicking on one of the buttons displayed:

View Screenshot

(This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored.)



The screenshot is shown in a separate browser window.

Preview Screenshot

(This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored.)



A thumbnail of the screenshot is shown in the ASR Screenshot group.

Make Screenshot

Takes a new video screenshot.

Delete Screenshot

(This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored.)



The video screenshot stored in the iRMC firmware is deleted after you have confirmed that you wish to do so.

iRMC S4

325

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

AVR Active Session Table - Show current AVR sessions

The AVR Active Session Table lists the currently active AVR sessions. If no AVR session is currently active then the AVR Active Session Table is not displayed.

If two AVR Sessions are currently active, a Disconnect button is displayed for each Session.

Figure 211: AVR Active Session Table - (two active AVR sessions)

Disconnect

If you click Disconnect, a confirmation dialog box appears in which you can close the AVR session to the left of the button.

You can only close AVR sessions of other users with the

Disconnect

button. To close your own session, choose Exit from the

Extras

menu in the AVR window (see

page 91

326

iRMC

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Video Redirection Options

This function is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.

The Video Redirection Options group allows you to specify various options that apply for the duration of the AVR session.

Figure 212: Video Redirection Options

HTML5 Viewer Enabled

When this option is enabled:

– The button in the Video Redirection group changes from Start Video

Redirection (Java Web-Start)

to Start Video Redirection (HTML5).

– The node Video Redirection (JWS) in the navigation tree changes to

Video Redirection (HTML5)

Both elements open a browser window containing the AVR via HTML5 interface.

Default Mouse Mode

Defines the default mouse mode (Absolute Mouse Mode, Relative Mouse

Mode

, or Other Mouse Mode).

Depending on the server operating system, you must make the following settings:

– Windows: Absolute mouse mode, Hide mouse mode (Relative) or Relative

mouse mode

– Linux: Absolute mouse mode, Hide mouse mode (Relative) or Relative

mouse mode.

Default setting: Absolute mouse mode iRMC S4

327

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Local Monitor Off Control

The current status of the local monitor is indicated the AVR Video menu and displayed via the second icon from the right in the AVR

Tool bar (see

section "AVR Tool bar" on page 106

Enables / disables the Local Monitor Off Control function of the iRMC.

Enabled

Enables the Local Monitor Off Control function. In full-access mode of an AVR session, you can switch the local monitor of the server on and off from the remote workstation.

Disabled

Disables the Local Monitor Off Control function, i.e. the local monitor is always switched on and cannot be switched off.

Automatic Off when AVR is started

This option only takes effect if the Local Monitor Off Control function is enabled.

If you enable the Automatic Off when AVR is started option, the local monitor is automatically switched off for the duration of the session when an AVR session is started. After the AVR session is closed, the local monitor is automatically switched on again if no concurrent session with enabled Local Monitor Off control is active.

Parallel AVR sessions:

Even if you switch on the local monitor during your AVR session, the local monitor is automatically switched off again if a new, concurrent AVR session is started.

The local monitor is switched on again automatically when all AVR sessions have been closed.

AVR Title

Title of your choice which will be displayed in the AVR title bar.

The following predefined variables can be used in the AVR title:

%USER%, %BMC,_NAME%, %BMC_IP%, %CHASSIS_TYPE%,

%SYSTEM_TYPE%, %SYSTEM_SERIAL%, %SYSTEM_NAME%,

%SYSTEM_IP%, %SYSTEM_OS%, %ASSET_TAG%

Current AVR Title

Displays the AVR title which will be displayed in the AVR title bar.

328

iRMC

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

Video Redirection - Starting AVR using Java

You start AVR in the Video Redirection group.

Figure 213: Advanced Video Redirection page - Local Monitor

Ê Click Start Video Redirection (Java Web-Start) to start a second AVR session.

The Java applet for Advanced Video Redirection is started.

For details on the AVR window, see chapter "Advanced Video

Redirection (AVR)" on page 79

The two active AVR sessions are shown as follows on the Advanced Video

Redirection

page:

Figure 214: AVR window with two active AVR sessions iRMC S4

329

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Disconnect

If you click Disconnect, a confirmation dialog box appears in which you can close the AVR session to the left of the button.

You can only close AVR sessions of other users with the

Disconnect

button. To close your own session, choose Exit from the

Extras

menu in the AVR window (see

page 91

The following window appears if the managed server is powered down:

Figure 215: AVR window when the server is powered down

Video Redirection - Starting AVR using HTML5

You start AVR in the Video Redirection group.

Figure 216: Advanced Video Redirection page - Starting Video Redirection

330

iRMC

Console Redirection - Redirecting the console

Ê Click Start Video Redirection (HTML5) to start an AVR session.

The default browser starts with the Advanced Video Redirection, see

section

"Using AVR via HTML5" on page 109

The active session is displayed in the AVR Active Sessions Table group.

iRMC S4

331

Virtual Media

7.17 Virtual Media

The Virtual Media feature provides the managed server with a “virtual” drive which is physically located elsewhere in the network. The source for the virtual drive can be a physical drive (floppy, disk drive, CD-ROM/DVD-ROM) or an ISO image (image file).

In order to use the iRMC function Virtual Media, you require a license key

(see

page 176

You can make the virtual media available as a physical drive or image file at the remote workstation (see

page 112

). The image file may also be a network drive

(with drive letter, e.g. “D:” for drive D):

The Virtual Media link contains links to the following pages:

–

"Virtual Media Options - Configuring virtual media options" on page 333 .

–

"Remote Image Mount - connecting remote ISO images" on page 335

This link is only displayed if Remote Image Mount support has been enabled in the Virtual Media Options page.

332

iRMC

Virtual Media

7.17.1 Virtual Media Options - Configuring virtual media options

The Virtual Media Options page allows you to configure the options for the virtual media provided via the iRMC.

Figure 217: Virtual Media Options page

USB Attach Mode

Attach mode of the virtual media.

The following modes are offered for selection:

Always Attach

The virtual media is always attached to the server.

Auto Attach

The virtual media is attached to the server only when a virtual media session is started.

Number of Floppy Devices

Maximum number of Floppy devices that may be used in a Virtual Media session. 0 to 4 Floppy devices can be configured. Default: 0.

Number of CD/DVD Devices

Maximum number of CD/DVD devices that may be used in a Virtual

Media session. 0 to 4 four CD/DVD devices can be configured. Default: 2.

iRMC S4

333

Virtual Media

Number of Harddisk Devices

Maximum number of hard disk devices that may be used in a Virtual

Media session. 0 to 4 four hard disk devices can be configured.

Default: 1.

Enable Remote Image Mount

Enables / disables the Remote Image Mount, which makes it possible to host CD/DVD, Floppy, and hard disk ISO images on a server in the network.

Activating the Enable Remote Image Mount option displays the additional

Remote Image Mount

link under Virtual Media in the navigation area.

Clicking the Remote Image Mount link opens the Remote Image Mount page which contains the panels for configuring the Image Options of the corresponding image type (see

page 335

Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.

334

iRMC

Virtual Media

7.17.2 Remote Image Mount - connecting remote ISO images

The Remote Image Mount function makes available to the managed server

CD/DVD, Floppy, and hard disk ISO images that host on a server in the network.

The Remote Image Mount page contains the groups for configuring the Image

Options

of the corresponding image type (CD/DVD, Floppy, and hard disk ISO images).

Figure 218: Remote Image Mount page iRMC S4

335

Virtual Media

Remote CD/DVD Image Options / Remote Floppy Image Options / Remote

Hard Disk Image Options

These groups each allow you to configure the options for mounting the remote images of the corresponding type and to establish / clear the connect to the remote image. Additionally, you can restart the Remote Image Mount service

(e.g.in case of a failure).

Share Type

Share type of the network share where the ISO images are located.

The following modes are offered for selection:

CIFS/SMB Common Interface File System

Share type of the network share is CIFS SMB (Common Interface

File System).

NFS Network File System

The virtual media is attached to the server only when a virtual media session is started.

Server

IP address or DNS name of the server hosting the remote images

(remote image server for short).

Share Name

Name of the network share the remote image server belongs to.

Image Name

Name of / path to the remote image.

User Name

User name required for accessing the network share.

Password

Enter the password for the user.

Confirm Password

Reenter the password for confirmation.

Domain

Domain of the user.

Apply

Activates your settings.

Connect

Connects the remote image to the managed server.

336

iRMC

Virtual Media

Disconnect

Clears the remote image connection.

Restart Service

Restarts the Remote Image Mount service (e.g. in case of a failure).

Connecting the remote image to the managed server

Suppose you have configured the Remote CD/DVD Image Options as follows:

Figure 219: Remote CD/DVD Image Options are configured

To connect to the remote image to the managed server, proceed as follows:

Click Apply to activate your settings.

Ê Click Connect.

The Remote CD/DVD Image Options group is shown as follows, indicating that the remote image is now connected to the managed server: iRMC S4

337

Virtual Media

Figure 220: Remote CD/DVD Image Options

To clear the connection to the remote image, click Disconnect.

To restart the Remote Image Mount service (e.g. in case of a failure), click

Restart Service

338

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

7.18 Lifecycle Management

The embedded Lifecycle Management functionality (eLCM) of the iRMC allows you to configure and perform lifecycle management of a PRIMERGY server with a few mouse clicks centrally from the iRMC web interface without the need of handling physical devices.

eLCM provided by the iRMC comprises the following functions:

– eLCM update management

– eLCM image management

– eLCM health management

To use the eLCM functionality, you need a valid eLCM license key which is purchased together with the iRMC SD card. The SD card is used as the iRMC -related non-volatile mass data storage and is mounted in the iRMC -internal Linux file system. From the server side, files on the iRMC

SD card may be read and written through the PCIe interface via HTI

(High-speed Transfer Protocol). In particular, communication between the iRMC and the ServerView Agentless Service occurs via HTI.

The Lifecycle Management link contains links to the following pages:

–

"Update Settings - Configuring general eLCM update settings" on page 340 .

–

"Online Update - Configuring the eLCM online update" on page 341 .

–

"Offline Update - Configuring the eLCM offline update" on page 346 .

–

"Custom Image - Handling custom images" on page 352 .

–

"PrimeCollect - Health management" on page 356 .

The iRMC supports an SD card for non-volatile mass data storage. The SD card is mounted in the iRMC -internal Linux file system. From the server side, files on the iRMC SD card may be read and written through the PCIe interface via

HTI.

In order to use the iRMC function Lifecycle Management, you require a

license key (see page 176 ).

iRMC S4

339

Lifecycle Management

7.18.1 Update Settings - Configuring general eLCM update settings

The Update Settings page allows you to configure the options for the eLCM update repository.

Figure 221: Common Update Settings page

Repository Location

URL of the update repository used for the eLCM update.



Default: https://support.ts.fujitsu.com

Use Proxy

Specifies whether a proxy server should be used. The proxy settings can be configured / changed in the Network Settings -Proxy Settings page (see

page 262 ).

Apply Settings

Applies your settings.

Default Repository

Repository location is set to default (https://support.ts.fujitsu.com ).

Test Repository Connection

Tests the connection to the repository.

340

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

7.18.2 Online Update - Configuring the eLCM online update

The Online Update page allows you to update BIOS and controller firmware while the server operating system is running. On Windows systems, it is also possible to update drivers supported by PSPs (PRIMERGY Support Packages, see the manual "Local System Update for PRIMERGY Server" for details).

Figure 222: Online Update page

Starting an online update always comprises the following steps:

1. Performing the update check.

2. Starting the online update process.

Both steps, which are described in detail below, can be executed manually or scheduled.

Full Online update functionality is only available if the ServerView

Agentless Service is running on the server operating system. Otherwise, only iRMC and/or BIOS firmware can be updated. The System Information group in the System Overview page informs you whether the ServerView

Agentless service is available (see

page 137

The ServerView Agentless Service provides driver and firmware inventory data and finally installs the component driver and firmware updates on the managed server while the system is up and running. iRMC S4

341

Lifecycle Management

For a more detailed description, see the manual "ServerView embedded

Lifecycle Management (eLCM)"

Online Update - Configuring and starting the online update

The Online Update group allows you to configure and start both the update check and the online update itself.

Update settings cannot be changed while an update is being executed.

Figure 223: Online Update page - Online Update group

Update Check

Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start the update check immediately, at a fixed date, or periodically.

immediate

Starts the update check immediately.

daily

Starts the update check once a day at the specified time.

weekly

Starts the update check once a week at the specified day and time.

monthly

Starts the update check once a month at the specified day and time.

yearly

Starts the update check once a year at the specified date and time.

once only

Starts the update check at the specified date and time.

342

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

never

Never starts the update check.

Once the update check process has successfully completed, the

Available Updates

list is displayed in the Online Update group. There, you can select/deselect the components which you want to be updated.

Updates displayed with Severity "essential" cannot be deselected.

Figure 224: Online Update group - update check performed

Start Update Process

Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start the update process immediately, at a fixed date, or periodically.

immediate

Starts the update process immediately.

after check

Automatically starts an update process that directly follows an

(immediately) initiated update check.

daily

Starts the update process once a day at the specified time.

weekly

Starts the update process once a week at the specified day and time.

monthly

Starts the update process once a month at the specified day and time.

yearly

Starts the update process once a year at the specified date and time.

iRMC S4

343

Lifecycle Management

once only

Starts the update process at the specified date and time.

never

Never starts the update process.

Activate

Starts an update check and/or the online update according to the settings configured under Update Check and Start Update Process:

Update

Check

immediate scheduled immediate scheduled never never

Start Update

Process

Resulting behavior

after check after check never never immediate scheduled

Update check is started immediately, Subsequently, update process is automatically started. All available update components are installed. No user interaction.

Scheduled update check. All available update components are installed. No user interaction.

Update check is started immediately, Update process is not started automatically.

Scheduled update checks none of which is followed by an automatically started update process.

Based on the result of a separately performed update check, the update process is started immediately.

This allows you to explicitly select/deselect one or more of the components offered for selection by the former update check before starting the update process.

Based on the result of a separately performed update check, the update process is started immediately.

This allows you to explicitly select/deselect one or more of the components offered for selection by the former update check before starting the update process.

Table 9: Online update settings

1 daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, once only

Cancel

Cancels the update check.

344

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

Online Update Logs

The Online Update Logs group informs you if a log file of the online update is available, and, if this applies, allows you to store the log file.

Figure 225: Online Update page - Online Update Logs

Save

Opens a confirmation dialog which offers to store the log file. The Save button is disabled if no log file is available.

iRMC S4

345

Lifecycle Management

7.18.3 Offline Update - Configuring the eLCM offline update

The Offline Update page allows you to update system components like network or storage controller firmware on the managed server. Additionally, you can install BIOS and iRMC firmware updates.

An offline update is the method of choice if no Agentless Service is running on the managed server, or if the Agentless Service does not support the server operating system. The System Information group in the System Overview page informs you whether the ServerView Agentless Service is available on the

server (see page 137

Figure 226: Offline Update page

Roughly speaking, the offline update comprises the following steps which are processed automatically:

1. The iRMC downloads all necessary files (in particular the eLCM offline update manager, which is a slim version of the ServerView

Update Manager Express) and the local update repository onto the iRMC SD card.

2. The iRMC creates a bootable CD ROM image from these components and mounts it as a virtual CD ROM device.

346

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

3. The iRMC shuts down the managed server and reboots the system from the mounted CD ROM device.

4. The eLCM offline update manager, which is a slim version of the

ServerView Update Manager Express, installs the firmware updates.

For a more detailed description, see the manual "ServerView embedded

Lifecycle Management (eLCM)".

Starting an offline update always comprises the following steps:

1. Preparing the offline update.

2. Starting the offline update process.

Both steps, which are described in detail below, can be executed manually or scheduled.

Offline Update - preparing and starting the offline update

The Offline Update group allows you to prepare and start the offline update process.

Update settings cannot be changed while an update is being executed.

Figure 227: Offline Update page - Offline Update group iRMC S4

347

Lifecycle Management

Prepare Offline Update

Prepares the offline update.

Preparing the offline update includes the following activities which are automatically performed by the iRMC:

– Downloading from the latest firmware update packages for system components, iRMC firmware and BIOS to the iRMC.

– Creating a system-specific local copy of the Update-DVD.iso.

Only components specific for the managed server are regarded.

This ISO image also contains an XML-File that defines the tasks for the update process. This file is called UserProfile.xml

Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start preparing the offline update process immediately, automatically at a fixed date, or periodically.

immediate

Prepares the update immediately.

daily

Prepares the update once a day at the specified time.

weekly

Prepares the update once a week at the specified day and time.

monthly

Prepares the update process once a month at the specified day and time.

yearly

Prepares the update once a year at the specified date and time.

once only

Prepares the update at the specified date and time.

never

Never starts the update process.

Start Update Process

Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start the update check immediately, automatically at a fixed date, or periodically.

immediate

Starts the update process immediately.

348

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

after preparation

Automatically starts an update process that directly follows an

(immediately) initiated update preparation.

daily

Starts the update process once a day at the specified time.

weekly

Starts the update process once a week at the specified day and time.

monthly

Starts the update process once a month at the specified day and time.

yearly

Starts the update process once a year at the specified date and time.

once only

Starts the update process at the specified date and time.

never

Never starts the update process.

Include BIOS and iRMC Firmware Updates

This option affects the Prepare Offline update process.



Specifies whether the UserProfile.xml includes/excludes the BIOS and iRMC Firmware tasks on prepare offline update. So the ISO image always contains the update files, but the update tasks are either included or excluded.

iRMC S4

349

Lifecycle Management

Activate

Starts the preparation and/or the offline update according to the settings configured under Prepare Offline Update and Start Update Process:

Prepare



Offline update

immediate immediate scheduled scheduled never never

Start Update

Process

Resulting behavior

never after preparation never after preparation

Preparing the offline update is started immediately,

Update process is not started automatically.

Preparing the offline update is started immediately,

Subsequently, update process is automatically started. No user interaction.

Scheduled preparation of the offline update is started immediately, Update process is not started automatically.

Scheduled preparation of the update in combination with subsequently started update process. All available update components are installed. No user interaction.

immediate scheduled

The update process is started immediately. This requires that an update iso-image made available by a former update preparation is already available on the iRMC.

The update process is started in a scheduled manner. This requires that an update iso-image made available by a former update preparation is already available on the iRMC.

Table 10: Offline update settings

After update process is started, the managed server is shut down. The eLCM Offline

Update Manager is started and performs the update.

daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, once only

Cancel

Cancels preparing / executing the offline update. Cancel only works as long as the download has not started. Once the download is started, the

Cancel

button is disabled.

350

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

Offline Update Logs

The Offline Update Logs group informs you if a log file related to the offline update is available, and, if this applies, allows you to store the log file.

Figure 228: Online Update page - Online Update Logs

Save

Opens a confirmation dialog which offers to store the log file. The Save button is disabled if no log file is available.

iRMC S4

351

Lifecycle Management

7.18.4 Custom Image - Handling custom images

The Custom Image page allows you to specify a URL from which you can download ISO images onto the iRMC SD card. The download itself can be initiated manually or scheduled by a timer. The downloaded images are subsequently displayed for selection.

Figure 229: Custom Image page

Custom Image URL

Here you can specify the URL from which ISO images should be downloaded onto the iRMC.

Image Description

Here you can enter a textual description of the image.

352

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

Download Custom Image

Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start downloading the custom image immediately, automatically at a fixed date, or periodically.

immediate

Downloads the custom image immediately.

once only

Downloads the custom image at the specified date and time.

never

Never downloads the custom image.

Intended Boot Mode

Specifies the initial intended boot mode that will be assigned to a newly downloaded ISO image. If you select an automatically triggered boot

(e.g. “after download”, “daily”, “weekly”), this will be the used boot mode.

In the Downloaded Ccustom Image list there is a new column named

Intended boot mode.

– PC compatible (legacy)

– Extensible Firmware Interface Boot (EFI)

Execute Custom Image

Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start activating the custom image immediately, automatically at a fixed date, or periodically.

after download

Automatically executes the custom image automatically after an

(immediately) initiated download.

immediate

Executes the custom image immediately.

daily

Executes the custom image once a day at the specified time.

weekly

Executes the custom image once a week at the specified day and time.

monthly

Executes the custom image once a month at the specified day and time.

iRMC S4

353

Lifecycle Management

yearly

Executes the custom image once a year at the specified date and time.

once only

Executes the custom image at the specified date and time.

never

Never executes the custom image.

Activate

Starts the download and/or the execution of the selected custom image according to the settings configured under Download Custom Image and

Execute Custom Image

Download

Custom Image

immediate

Execute

Custom Image

Resulting behavior

scheduled immediate scheduled never never

1 never never

Download of the custom image is started immediately. Custom image is not executed automatically.

Scheduled download of the custom image is enabled immediately. Custom image is not executed automatically. after download Download of the custom image is started immediately. Subsequently, execution of the custom image is automatically started. No user interaction.

after download Scheduled download of the custom image in combination with subsequent automatically started execution. No user interaction.

immediate scheduled

Execution of the custom image is started immediately. This requires that a custom image is already available on the iRMC SD card and offered for selection.

Execution of the custom image is started in a scheduled manner. This requires that a custom image is already available on the iRMC SD card and offered for selection.

Table 11: Custom image settings

1 daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, once only

354

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

Cancel

Cancels preparing the download. Cancel only works as long as the download has not started. Once the download is started, the Cancel button is disabled.

Delete Selected Image

Deletes the selected image(s) from the iRMC SD card.

Unmount Selected Image

Unmounts the selected image.

Custom Image Logs

The Custom Image Logs group informs you if a log file related to the custom image is available, and, if this applies, allows you to store the log file.

Figure 230: Online Update page - Online Update Logs

Save

Opens a confirmation dialog which offers to store the log file. The Save button is disabled if no log file is available.

iRMC S4

355

Lifecycle Management

7.18.5 PrimeCollect - Health management

The PrimeCollect page allows you to store several PrimeCollect archives on the iRMC SD card. Additionally, you can define one special “reference image” which will not be overwritten by the ring buffer principle.

Out-of-band eLCM provided by the iRMC extends and enhances the standard

PrimeCollect functionality and usability as follows:

– Creating PrimeCollect archives automatically and scheduled.

– Storing PrimeCollect archive files on the iRMC SD card. In particular, you can define one special “reference image” which will not be overwritten by the ring buffer principle.

– Maintaining a history of PrimeCollect archives.

– Transferring PrimeCollect archives to another server via management LAN or AIS Connect.

– Downloading PrimeCollect archive to the local computer.

PrimeCollect archive file creating is based on the communication between the iRMC and the ServerView Agentless Service. The System Information group in the System Overview page informs you whether the ServerView Agentless

Service is available on the server (see

page 137

Figure 231: PrimeCollect page - Schedule PrimeCollect archives

356

iRMC

Lifecycle Management

Schedule PrimeCollect archives

The Schedule PrimeCollect archives group allows you to configure archive creation and download.

Figure 232: PrimeCollect page

Status

Displays the current status of the archive creation and update process.

Perform archive creation & download

Here you configure whether clicking Activate will start activating the custom image immediately, automatically at a fixed date, or periodically.

immediate

Performs archive creation and download immediately.

daily

Performs archive creation and download once a day at the specified time.

weekly

Performs archive creation and download once a week at the specified day and time.

monthly

Performs archive creation and download once a month at the specified day and time.

yearly

Performs archive creation and download once a year at the specified date.

once only

Performs archive creation and download at the specified date.

never

Never performs archive creation and download.

iRMC S4

357

Lifecycle Management

Activate / Deactivate

Enables / disables the configuration:

– Clicking Activate starts archive creation and download corresponding to the settings configured under Perform archive creation & download

– Clicking Deactivate stops currently processed archive creation and download if the creation process has not started yet.

PrimeCollect archives list

The PrimeCollect archives list displays the list of available PrimeCollect archives.

Figure 233: PrimeCollect page - PrimeCollect archives list

Set as referenced

Marks the currently selected archive as the reference archive. If the list contains only one archive, this archive will automatically serve as the reference archive.

Delete

Deletes the selected archive from the list.

Download

Opens a file browser dialog allowing you open or save the selected archive.

358

iRMC

8 iRMC S4 via Telnet/SSH



(Remote Manager)

A Telnet-based interface is available for the iRMC. This is known as the Remote

Manager. You can call the Remote Manager over any Telnet/SSH client.

The iRMC supports secure connections over SSH (Secure Shell). The Remote

Manager interface is identical for Telnet and SSH connections. In principle, any

Telnet/SSH client that interprets VT100 sequences can be used to access the iRMC. It is nevertheless recommended that the iRMC S4 web interface or the

ServerView Remote Management Front end (referred to below simply as the

Remote Management Front end) be used.

This chapter describes operation of the iRMC from the Remote Manager and the various functions in detail. The end of the chapter also provides a brief overview of SMASH CLP.

iRMC S4

359

Requirements on the managed server

8.1 Requirements on the managed server

Access via Telnet must be activated for the iRMC (see the section

"Ports and

Network Services - Configuring ports and network services" on page 258

Access via the Telnet protocol is deactivated by default for security reasons, as passwords are transmitted in plain text.

Since the ServerView Operations Manager does not know the value of the management port, the Remote Management Front end works with the default value.

Since a connection is not automatically established when the Remote

Management Front end is started, you can correct any nonstandard value for the management port after the Remote Management Front end has been started.

360

iRMC

Operating Remote Manager

8.2 Operating Remote Manager

Operation of Remote view is described on the basis of the example in

figure 234 , which shows an excerpt from the main menu of the Remote

Manager.

Figure 234: Operating the Remote Manager

Ê Select the required menu item by entering the number or letter which precedes the menu item, e.g. “c” for “Change password”.

Functions that the user is not permitted to use are indicated by a dash (-) and functions that are not available are indicated by an asterisk (*).

Press [0] or the key combination [Ctrl] [D] to close the Remote Manager. An appropriate event will be written to the event log.

iRMC S4

361

Overview of menus

8.3 Overview of menus

The Remote Manager menu for the iRMC has the following structure:

●

System Information

– View Chassis Information

– View Mainboard Information

– View OS and SNMP Information

– Set ASSET Tag

●

Power Management

– Immediate Power Off

– Immediate Reset

– Power Cycle

– Power on

– Graceful Power Off (Shutdown)

– Graceful Reset (Reboot)

– Raise NMI (via iRMC)

●

Enclosure Information

– System Eventlog

– View System Eventlog (text, newest first)

– View System Eventlog (text, oldest first)

– Dump System Eventlog (raw, newest first)

– Dump System Eventlog (raw, oldest first)

– View System Eventlog Information

– Clear System Eventlog

362

iRMC

Overview of menus

– Internal Eventlog

– View Internal Eventlog (text, newest last)

– Dump Internal Eventlog (raw, newest last)

– View Internal Eventlog Information

– Clear Internal Eventlog

– Change Internal Eventlog mode

– Temperature

– Voltages/Current

●

– Fans

– Power Supplies

– Memory Sensor

– Door Lock

– CPU Sensors

– Component Status (Lightpath)

– List All Sensors

Service Processor

– Configure IP Parameters

– List IP Parameters

– Toggle Identify LED

– Reset iRMC (Warm reset)

●

– Reset iRMC (Cold reset)

RAID Management

– Controller information

– Physical device information

– Logical device information

– Array configuration information

– BBU status iRMC S4

363

Overview of menus

●

Change password

Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)

Start a Command Line shell

Console Logging

364

iRMC

Logging in

8.4 Logging in

When connecting to the iRMC, you are required to enter your login credentials

(user name and password). As soon as a connection to the iRMC S4 has been established, the main menu window of the Remote Manager (Telnet/SSH window) is displayed at the terminal client at the remote workstation.

Depending on whether ServerView agents have already been started at some point on the system, the main window is shown with or without system information.

When logging in over an SSH connection: If the host key of the managed server is not yet registered at the remote workstation, the SSH client issues a security alert with suggestions on how to proceed.

Figure 235: Remote Manager: Main menu window (with system information) iRMC S4

365

Logging in

Figure 236: Remote Manager: Main menu window (without system information)

The Remote Manager window contains information on the affected system. This information identifies the server and indicates its operating status (Power

Status). Some details (e.g. the System Name) are only shown for servers and only if the server is configured appropriately.

Ê In order to be able to use the Remote Manager, you must log in with a user name and a password.

Then an appropriate event will be written to the Event log and the relevant main menu of the Remote Manager displayed (see

section "Main menu of the Remote Manager" on page 367 ).

You can terminate the login process at any time using [Ctrl][D].

366

iRMC

Main menu of the Remote Manager

8.5 Main menu of the Remote Manager

Figure 237: Remote Manager: Main menu

The main menu of the Remote Manager provides the following functions:

System Information

...

Power Management...

Enclosure Information...

View information on the managed server and set the Asset Tag



(see section "System Information -

Information on the managed server" on page 371 ).

Power the server up or down.



(see section "Power Management" on page 373 ).

Request information on the current system status, e.g. check error and event messages from the error log and event log (temperature, fan, etc.)



(see section "Enclosure Information -

System event log and status of the sensors" on page 374

Table 12: Main menu of the Remote Manager iRMC S4

367

Main menu of the Remote Manager

Service Processor...

RAID Managerment..

Change password

Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)

Start a Command Line shell

Console Logging

...

Table 12: Main menu of the Remote Manager

Configure the iRMC (e.g. update firmware or change IP address)



(see section "Service processor - IP parameters, identification LED and iRMC S4 reset" on page 378 ).

Information on RAID controllers, physical and logical devices, array configuration and BBU status.



(see section "RAID Management" on page 379

Change the password



(see section "Change the password" on page 371

Text console redirection



(see section "Console Redirection

(EMS/SAC) - Start text console redirection" on page 380 ).

Start a command line shell



(see section "Start a Command Line shell... - Start a SMASH CLP shell" on page 380

Redirect output of messages to the text console



(see section "Console Logging -

Redirect message output to the text console (serial)" on page 381 ).

368

iRMC

Required user permissions

8.6 Required user permissions

In table 13 is given an overview of the user permissions which are required in

order to use the individual Remote Manager functions.

Remote Manager menu items Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required permission

View System Information...

View Chassis / Mainboard, / OS Information

Set ASSET Tag

Set System Name

Set System Operating System Information

Set System Description

Set System Location Information (SNMP)

Set System Contact Information (SNMP)

Power Management...

View Enclosure Information

System Eventlog

- View/Dump System Eventlog

System Eventlog

- Clear System Eventlog

Internal Eventlog

- View/Dump Internal Eventlog

Internal Eventlog

- Clear Internal Eventlog

Sensor overviews (Temperature, Fans ...)

View Service Processor...

Service Processor...

- List IP Parameters

Service Processor...

- Configure IP Parameters

Table 13: Permissions to use the Remote Manager menus

X X X

X X X X

X iRMC S4

369

Required user permissions

Remote Manager menu items Permitted with

IPMI privilege level

Required permission

Service Processor... - Toggle Identify LED

Service Proc. ... - Reset iRMC S4 (warm/cold reset)

View RAID Management.

View Controller information

View physical device information

View logical device information

View array configuration information

View BBU status

Change Password

Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)

Start a command Line shell...

Console Logging



Action is only possible if no agents are running.



System-dependent feature

Table 13: Permissions to use the Remote Manager menus

X X X X

X X

X X X

X X X X

X X X

370

iRMC

Change the password

8.7 Change the password

The Change password menu item allows a user with the privilege Configure User

Accounts

(see page 62 ) to change their own password or the passwords of other

users.

8.8 System Information -



Information on the managed server

The following menu appears if you choose System Information... from the main menu:

Figure 238: Remote Manager: System Information menu

The sub menu contains the following functions:

View Chassis Information

Information on the chassis of the managed server and its product data.

View Mainboard Information

Information on the main board of the managed server and its product data.

View OS and SNMP Information

Information on the operating system and the

ServerView version of the managed server and on the SNMP settings.

Table 14: System Information menu iRMC S4

371

System Information - Information on the managed server

Set ASSET Tag

Table 14: System Information menu

Sets a customer-specific asset tag for the managed server.

372

iRMC

Power Management

8.9 Power Management

The following menu appears if you choose Power Management... from the main menu:

Figure 239: Remote Manager: Power Management menu

The sub menu contains the following functions:

Immediate Power Off

Immediate Reset

Powers the server down, regardless of the status of the operating system.

Completely restarts the server (cold start), regardless of the status of the operating system.

Power Cycle

Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a configured period.

Power On

Graceful Power Off

(Shutdown)

Switches the server on.

Graceful shutdown and power off.



This menu item is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC S4 as

“Connected”.

Graceful Reset (Reboot)

Graceful shutdown and reboot.



This menu item is only available if ServerView agents are installed and signed onto the iRMC S4 as

“Connected”.

Table 15: Power Management menu iRMC S4

373

Enclosure Information

8.10 Enclosure Information -



System event log and status of the sensors

The following menu appears if you choose Enclosure Information... from the main menu:

Figure 240: Remote Manager: Enclosure Information menu

374

iRMC

Enclosure Information

The sub menu contains the following functions:

System Eventlog

Internal Eventlog

Temperature

Voltages/Current

Fans

Power Supplies

Door Lock

Memory Sensors

CPU Sensors

Component Status

List All Sensors

Call the System Eventlog menu (see the section

"System

Eventlog" on page 376 ).

Call the internal Eventlog menu (see the section

"Internal Eventlog" on page 377

Display information on the temperature sensors and their status.

Display information on the voltage and current sensors and their status.

Display information on the fans and their status.

Display information on the power supplies and their redundancy status.

Display information on whether the front panel or housing are open.

Display information on the memory statuses.

Localize the processors of the server.

Display detailed information on all sensors that have a

PRIMERGY diagnostic LED.

Display detailed information on all sensors.

Table 16: Enclosure Information menu iRMC S4

375

Enclosure Information

System Eventlog

The following menu appears if you select System Eventlog from the Enclosure

Information...

sub menu:

Figure 241: Remote Manager: System Eventlog menu

The sub menu contains the following functions:

View System Eventlog

(text, newest first)

View System Eventlog

(text, oldest first)

The contents of the System Event log are output to screen in a readable form and in chronological order

(the most recent entry first).

The contents of the System Event log are output to screen in a readable form and in reverse chronological order (the oldest entry first).

Dump System Eventlog

(raw, newest first)

The contents of the System Event log are dumped in chronological order (the most recent entry first).

Dump System Eventlog

(raw, oldest first)

The contents of the System Event log are dumped in reverse chronological order (the oldest entry first).

View System Eventlog

Information

Display information on the System Event log.

Clear System Eventlog

Clear the contents of the System Event log.

Change System

Eventlog mode

Changes the buffer mode of the System Event Log from Ring Buffer mode to Linear Buffer mode and vice versa.

Table 17: System Eventlog menu

376

iRMC

Enclosure Information

Internal Eventlog

The following menu appears if you select Internal Eventlog from the Enclosure

Information...

sub menu:

Figure 242: Remote Manager: Internal Eventlog menu

The sub menu contains the following functions:

View Internal Eventlog

(text, newest last)

The contents of the internal event log are output to screen in a readable form and in reverse chronological order (the most recent entry last).

Dump Internal

Eventlog (raw, newest last )

The contents of the internal event log are dumped in reverse chronological order (the most recent entry last).

View Internal Eventlog

Information

Display information on the internal event log.

Clear Internal Eventlog

Clear the contents of the internal event log.

Change Internal

Eventlog mode

Changes the buffer mode of the internal event log from

Ring Buffer

mode to Linear Buffer mode and vice versa.

Table 18: Internal Eventlog menu iRMC S4

377

Service Processor

8.11 Service processor - IP parameters, identification LED and iRMC S4 reset

The following menu appears if you choose Service Processor... from the main menu:

Figure 243: Remote Manager: Service Processor menu

The sub menu contains the following functions:

Configure IP Parameters

Configure the IPv4 / IPv6 address settings of the iRMC in a guided dialog. Please refer to

section

"Network Interface Settings - Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC" on page 251

for details in the individual settings.

List IP Parameters

Toggle Identify LED

Reset iRMC S4



(Warm reset)

Reset iRMC S4



(Cold reset)

Display the IP settings.

Switch the PRIMERGY identification LED on/off.

Reset the iRMC. The connection is closed.



Only the interfaces are re-initialized.

Reset the iRMC. The connection is closed.



The entire iRMC is re-initialized.

Table 19: Service Processor menu

It is recommended that you reboot the server after a Reset iRMC S4 (Cold

Reset)

or Reset iRMC S4 (Warm Reset) (see page 201 ).

378

iRMC

Service Processor

8.12 RAID Management

The following menu appears if you choose RAID Management... from the main menu:

Figure 244: Remote Manager: Service Processor menu

The sub menu contains the following functions:

Controller Information

Provides information on each RAID controller on the managed server.

Physical Device Information

Provides information on each RAID physical disk on the managed server.

Logical Device Information

Provides information on the each RAID logical drives on the managed server.

Provides information on array configuration.

Array configuration information

BBU status

Provides information on status of the battery backup units (BBU).

Table 20: Service Processor menu iRMC S4

379

Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)

8.13 Console Redirection (EMS/SAC) -



Start text console redirection

You can start console redirection with the Console Redirection (EMS/SAC) item from the main menu.

Text-based console redirection only works over the LAN with Serial 1.

If console redirection is also to be used while the operating system is running, the Serial 1 Multiplexer must be set to System.

Use the keyboard shortcut "<ESC>(" or "~." (tilde dot) to exit the text console.

It is possible that only one of these options will work, depending on the type of PRIMERGY server used.

8.14 Start a Command Line shell... -



Start a SMASH CLP shell

Start a Command Line shell...

in the main menu allows you to start a SMASH CLP shell. SMASH CLP stands for “Systems Management Architecture for Server

Hardware Command Line Protocol”. This protocol permits a Telnet- or SSHbased connection between the management station and the managed server.

For further details on SMASH CLP, please refer to section "Command Line

Protocol (CLP)" on page 383

When you select (s) Start a Command Line shell... from the main menu, the following window appears:

Figure 245: Remote Manager: Start a SMASH CLP shell... menu

Ê Choose (1) Start a SMASH CLP shell... to start the SMASH CLP shell.

380

iRMC

Console Logging

8.15 Console Logging - Redirect message output to the text console (serial)

The Console Logging item in the main menu allows you to redirect message output (logging) to the text console (serial interface).

When you select (l) Console Logging from the main menu, the following window appears:

Figure 246: Remote Manager: Console Logging menu

The sub menu contains the following functions:

Change Logging Run state

Show and change the logging run state.



For a more detailed description, see

"Console Logging Run State Menu" on page 382

Clear the console logging buffer.

Clear Console Logging buffer

Replay Console (Fast mode)

Show the console log (in fast mode)

Replay Console (Continuous mode)

Show the console log



(in continuous mode)

Table 21: Console Logging menu iRMC S4

381

Console Logging

Console Logging Run State Menu

Figure 247: Remote Manager: Console Logging Run State menu

The Console Logging Run State Menu provides the following functions:

Start Console Logging

Start output of messages to the text console.

Stop Console Logging

Stop output of messages to the text console.

Toggle to Text Mode

Switch to text mode.



All escape sequences are filtered out before messages are output to the console.

Toggle to Normal Mode

Switch to normal mode.



In normal mode, only the following escape sequences are filtered out before messages are output to the console:



<ESC>(



<ESC>stop



<ESC>Q



<ESC>R<ESC>r<ESC>R



<ESC>^



This means that color, pseudo-graphics, etc. can also be represented to a limited extent.

Table 22: Console Logging Run State menu

382

iRMC

Command Line Protocol (CLP)

8.16 Command Line Protocol (CLP)

The iRMC supports various text-based user interfaces, known as user shells, which can be configured differently for individual users.

The System Management Architecture for Server Hardware (SMASH) initiative defines a number of specifications with the following objectives:

– Provision of standardized interfaces for managing heterogeneous computer environments,

– Provision of an architecture framework with uniform interfaces, hardware and software discovery, resource addressing and data models.

You can find further information on SMASH under the following link:

http://www.dmtf.org/standards/smash

SMASH CLP syntax

SMASH CLP specifies a common command line syntax and message protocol semantics for managing computers on the Internet and in enterprise and service provider environments. You can find detailed information on SMASH

CLP in the DMTF document “Server Management Command Line Protocol

Specification (SM CLP) DSP0214”.

The general syntax of the CLP is as follows:

<verb> [<options>] [<target>] [<properties>]

<verb>

Verbs specify the command or action to be executed. The list of verbs describes the following activities, for instance:

– Establish (set) and retrieve (show) data,

– Change the status of a target (reset, start, stop),

– Manage the current session (cd, version, exit),

– Return information on commands (help).

In iRMC systems, the verb oemfujitsu also allows the use of special OEM commands.

iRMC S4

383

Command Line Protocol (CLP)

Command options modify the action or the behavior of a verb. Options can immediately follow the verb in a command line and must always be introduced by a dash ("-").

Options allow you to, for instance,

– define the output format,

– permit recursive execution of a command,

– display the version of a command or

– request help.

<target> specifies the address or the path of the object to be manipulated by the command, i.e. the target of the command. This can be a single managed element such as a hard disk, a network adapter (Network

Interface Card, NIC), or the management program (Management

Assistance Program, MAP) itself. Targets can, however, also be services such as a transport service.

Several managed elements which can be managed by the management program can be subsumed under a single <target>, for instance the entire system.

Only one <target> may be specified for each command.

<properties> describe the properties of the target of the command which are required to execute the command. Thus, <properties> identify the properties of the target’s class that are to be retrieved or modified by the command.

User data in the CLP (overview)

Data within the CLP is structured hierarchically. The command cd allows you to navigate within this structure.

Hierarchy of the CLP commands

An overview of the CLP command hierarchy is shown in

table 23 on page 385

384

iRMC

Command Line Protocol (CLP)

Table 23: Hierarchy of the CLP commands iRMC S4

385

9 Configuring iRMC S4 using the

Server Configuration Manager

You can use the Server Configuration Manager to

– configure power consumption control via iRMC on the managed server,

– configure power supply redundancy via iRMC on the managed server,

– configure AVR title, license key and other features on the iRMC,

– configure iRMC time settings

– configure iRMC for providing virtual media,

– configure iRMC DNS registration,

– configure iRMC DNS server,

– configure iRMC Email alerting,

– configure iRMC Email format settings

– configure iRMC SNMP alerting,

– configure local user management on the iRMC,

– configure a directory server for the iRMC

– configure the CAS service on the iRMC.

Requirements:

The current ServerView agents must be installed on the managed server.

The Server Configuration Manager functions can be accessed in the following ways:

– Locally on managed servers using the ServerView Installation Manager.

– Locally on managed Windows-based servers using the Windows Start menu.

This is only supported for servers on which the ServerView agents for

Windows are installed.

iRMC S4

387

Configuring via Server Configuration Manager

– On the remote workstation using the graphical interface of the Operations

Manager.

This is only supported for servers on which the ServerView agents for

Windows are installed.

This chapter in detail describes the various ways to call the Server Configuration

Manager.

For details on the Configuration Manager dialog pages, please refer to the online help of the Server Configuration Manager.

388

iRMC

Configuring via Server Configuration Manager

9.1 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the ServerView Installation Manager

You can call the Server Configuration Manager from the ServerView Installation

Manager (Installation Manager for short). Configuration via the Installation

Manager is of significance when installing the server. The Installation Manager makes the Server Configuration Manager available both during preparation for installation and as a separate maintenance program. The Installation Manager is described in the manual “ServerView Installation Manager”.

9.2 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the Windows Start menu

On Windows-based servers, you can also call the Server Configuration

Manager via the Windows Start menu.

To do this, proceed as follows:

Ê On the managed server, select:



Start – All Programs – Fujitsu – ServerView – Agents – Configuration Tools –

System Configuration.

The System Configuration window opens:

Figure 248: System Configuration window iRMC S4

389

Configuring via Server Configuration Manager

Ê Accept the preset values.

Ê Click OK.

The tab view of the System Configuration window opens.

You can scroll to the left and right through the tabs by clicking the arrows next to the tabs.

Applying settings

To apply the settings made in the individual tabs, proceed as follows for each tab:

Ê Click the Apply button.

Ê Click the Save Page button.

The iRMC automatically reboots to activate the changed settings.

390

iRMC

Configuring via Server Configuration Manager

9.3 Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the Operations Manager

The Server Configuration Manager dialog boxes for configuring the iRMC are also available from the graphical user interface of the Operations Manager. This allows you to configure the iRMC of the managed server from the remote workstation via a Web interface.

Proceed as follows:

Ê Start the Operations Manager (refer to the manual “ServerView Operations

Manager”).

The start window of the Operations Manager opens:

Figure 249: Operations Manager: Start window iRMC S4

391

Configuring via Server Configuration Manager

Ê Choose Server Configuration from the Administration menu of the Operations

Manager start window.

This opens the following window:

Figure 250: Operations Manager: Server Configuration window - Server list (1) tab

392

iRMC

Configuring via Server Configuration Manager

Ê In the hierarchy tree of the Server list tab, select the server to be configured.

This opens the following window:

Figure 251: Operations Manager: Server Configuration window - Server list (2) tab

On the right-hand side of the window, specify the details on the selected server and confirm your entries by clicking GO.

The first dialog of the Server Configuration manager opens.

iRMC S4

393

10 Firmware update

This chapter provides you with information about the following topics:

– iRMC S4 firmware (overview)

– Creating a memory stick for updating the firmware

– Updating firmware images

– Emergency flash

– flash tools

CAUTION!

When updating / downgrading the firmware, note that the problem-free operation of the firmware can only be guaranteed if the runtime firmware and the SDR (Sensor Data Record) both belong to the same firmware release.

The current firmware versions are present on the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or can be downloaded manually from the Download section of the Fujitsu

Technology Solutions web server.

You can obtain the up-to-date version of the ServerView Suite DVD 2 at two-monthly intervals.

Besides the possibility of performing a firmware update, you can also downgrade the firmware to the previous version.

Before updating or downgrading the firmware, read the supplementary documentation supplied with the new firmware carefully (in particular the

Readme files).

iRMC S4

395

iRMC S4 firmware (overview)

10.1 iRMC S4 firmware (overview)

The iRMC S4 uses two different firmware images. The two firmware images each are stored on a 32-MB EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable

Read-Only Memory):

– Firmware image 1 (low FW image)

– Firmware image 2 (high FW image)

The firmware of the iRMC S4 is not executed in the EEPROM, but is instead loaded into SRAM memory on startup and executed there. This means that it is possible to update both active and inactive firmware images online, i.e. with the server operating system (Windows or Linux) running.

If an error occurs while loading the firmware from one of the images, the firmware is automatically loaded from the other image.

Information on the iRMC S4 firmware and EEPROM can be found

– In the iRMC S4 web interface, page iRMC S4 Information (see

page 173 ) or

–

Using the flash tool (see page 408 ).

Active and passive firmware image

One of the two firmware images is active (running) at any given time, while the other is inactive. The firmware image that is active depends on the so-called firmware selector (see

page 397

396

iRMC

iRMC S4 firmware (overview)

Firmware selector

The firmware selector specifies the iRMC S4 firmware to be executed. Every time the iRMC S4 is reset and restarted, the firmware selector is evaluated and processing branches to the corresponding firmware.

The firmware selector can have the following values:

0 Firmware image containing the most recent firmware version

1 firmware image 1

2 firmware image 2

3 Firmware image containing the oldest firmware version

4 Firmware image most recently updated

5 Firmware image that has been updated least recently

Depending on the update variant used, the firmware selector is set differently after the update.

You can query and explicitly set the firmware selector

– On the iRMC S4 Information page of the iRMC S4 web interface (see

"Running Firmware" on page 175 ) or

– Using the flash tool (see

page 408

iRMC S4

397

Setting up the USB memory stick

10.2 Setting up the USB memory stick

You do not need the USB memory stick if you update the firmware of the iRMC in one of the following ways:

– Using the ServerView Update Manager

– Using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP

– Using the iRMC web interface and TFTP server

Proceed as follows:

Download the firmware iRMC Firmware Update for USB Stick from the

Download section of the Fujitsu Technology Solutions web server to a directory on your computer.

The ZIP archive FTS_<spec>.zip can be found in your download directory.

(The <spec> part of the name provides information on the system type, system board, firmware/SDRR version etc.)

The ZIP archive includes the following files:

–

USBImage.exe

–

iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.exe

–

iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.IMA

Ê Connect the USB memory stick to your computer.

Ê Start the file iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.exe or the file USBImage.exe.

One of the following windows is opened depending on the file you call (see

figure 252 on page 399

398

iRMC

Setting up the USB memory stick

Figure 252: Copying the image file to the USB memory stick



(with iRMC_<Firmware version>.exe)

Figure 253: Copying the image file to the USB memory stick (with USBImage.exe)

If you have called USBImag.exe, then under Image File:, you must explicitly specify the file iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.IMA.

Click Clear USB Device to delete the data from the USB memory stick.

iRMC S4

399

Setting up the USB memory stick

Ê Click Copy Image File to USB Device to copy the file

BMC_<Firmware-Version>.IMA

to the USB memory stick and extract it.

CAUTION!

This action overwrites the content of the USB memory stick.

When the copy operation is complete, the flash tools and image files are present on the USB memory stick.

Figure 254: Image files and flash tool on the USB memory stick.

400

iRMC

Updating firmware images

10.3 Updating firmware images

Since the iRMC S4 firmware executes in the SRAM memory of the iRMC S4, it is possible to update both active and inactive firmware images online, i.e. with the server operating system running.

The following methods are available for updating the firmware images:

– over the iRMC web interface

– using the ServerView Update Manager

– using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP

– Update using the operating system flash tools.

If a new version of the bootloader is available, both firmware images will be automatically flashed within the same update process.

Downgrading the firmware to the previous version

Besides the possibility of performing a firmware update, you can also downgrade the firmware to the previous version.

The simplest way to downgrade the firmware is to store the previous-version firmware image as the inactive firmware image in the EEPROM of the iRMC S4.

In this case, you only have to set the firmware selector to this previous-version image (see

page 193

) and subsequently restart the iRMC S4 to activate the firmware.

You can also downgrade the firmware by applying the methods described in the following sections. In these cases, you perform a firmware update based on the firmware of the previous version. Special requirements to perform the downgrade are pointed out separately in the following sections.

10.3.1 Update via the iRMC web interface

The iRMC S4 Firmware Update page allows you to update the firmware of the iRMC by providing the firmware image either locally on the remote workstation,

on a network share, or on a TFTP server (see section "iRMC S4 Firmware

Update" on page 192

iRMC S4

401

Updating firmware images

10.3.2 Update using the ServerView Update Manager

Using the ServerView Update Manager, you can start the update of the iRMC S4 firmware via a graphical user interface or via a command line interface

(Windows and Linux). The ServerView Update Manager accesses the update data via its Update Repository on the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or on the management server. You update the update repository on the management server by means of the Download Manager or by performing a manual download from the Download section of the Fujitsu Technology Solutions web server.

For more detailed information on firmware updates with the ServerView Update

Manager, see the “ServerView Update Manager” manual.

10.3.3 Online update using ServerView Update Manager

Express or ASP

Under Windows and Linux operating systems, you can update the iRMC firmware either using the graphical user interface of ServerView Update

Manager Express or by using the ASP (Autonomous Support Package) command interface.

Under Windows, you can also start an ASP in the Windows Explorer by doubleclicking the corresponding ASP-*.exe file.

When downgrading the firmware, please note:

– Downgrade via Update Manager Express:

The firmware downgrade is only feasible in the Expert mode. In addition, the Downgrade option must be activated.

– Downgrade via ASP:

Windows

You can perform the downgrade if you start the ASP by doubleclicking the corresponding *.exe file. When starting the ASP via the CLI, you must explicitly specify the Force=yes option.

Linux

You must explicitly specify option -f or option --force.

For more detailed information on firmware updates with Update Manager

Express and ASP, see the “Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers” manual.

402

iRMC

Updating firmware images

10.3.4 Update using the operating system flash tools

An online update using the operating system flash tools is only performed as a recovery flash, i.e. no version check is performed.

Prerequisite:

The flash tools and the files for the firmware update must be present in the file system of the managed server.

You use one of the following flash tools, depending on the operating system you are running:

DOS:

Windows: flirmcs4

 winflirmcs4



Prerequisite:



The ServerView agents for the used Windows operation system (32/64 bit) must be running on the managed server.

Windows (32 bit): w32flirmcs4 (No agents required.)

Windows (64 bit): w64flirmcs4 (No agents required.)

Linux: linflirmcs4

You call the flash tools in the Windows command line (flirmcs4, w32flirmcs4, w64flirmcs4, winflirmcs4) or at the Linux CLI (linflirmcs4).

The syntax and operands for the flash tools are described in section "Flash tools" on page 408 .

iRMC S4

403

Updating firmware images

Proceed as follows:

An online update using a USB memory stick is described below (see

section "Setting up the USB memory stick" on page 398 ).

Connect the USB memory stick to the managed server.

Ê In the Windows command line or the Linux Command Line Interface (CLI) switch to the drive corresponding to the USB memory stick.

Set the firmware selector to the value 4 by calling the flash tool with the parameter /s 4.

E. g., in the Windows command line you enter: w32flirmcs4 /b 4 or w64flirmcs4 /b 4

Start the update of the firmware and the SDR data by calling the flash tool with the corresponding update files.

E. g., in the Windows command line you enter: w32flirmcs4 *.bin /i or w64flirmcs4 *.bin /i

This flashes the new version into the inactive EEPROM.

Firmware and SDR are flashed from the same *.bin file.

If you call the flash tool with the parameter /wr, the updated firmware will automatically be activated once the flash has completed. In this case, it will not be necessary to reboot the iRMC.

During the firmware update, the console informs you about the progress of the update operation. If an error occurs, the update operation is aborted and a corresponding return code is reported (see

page 410

Restart the managed server. This automatically activates the firmware image with the updated firmware.

404

iRMC

Updating firmware images

10.3.5 Update via the FlashDisk menu

For an update via the FlashDisk menu, you require a bootable USB

memory stick (see section "Setting up the USB memory stick" on page 398

Proceed as follows:

Ê Connect the USB memory stick to the managed server (directly or via remote storage).

Boot from the USB memory stick.

After completion of the boot operation, the data in the USB memory stick is automatically copied to a RAM disk. The autoexec.bat file is then started automatically.

The FlashDisk menu opens:

Figure 255: FlashDisk menu

A firmware downgrade is only possible via recovery flash.

iRMC S4

405

Updating firmware images

Normal

A normal flash is performed.

During a normal flash operation, those areas of the EEPROM that contain the active firmware are checked to see whether they are up to date. If one of these areas is not up to date then the corresponding area for the inactive firmware is updated if it is not already up to date.

Recovery _L

A recovery flash for firmware image 1 (low firmware image) is carried out.

In the case of a recovery flash, the flash is performed for all three areas of firmware image 1 without any version check.

Recovery _U

A recovery flash for firmware image 2 (high firmware image) is carried out.

In the case of a recovery flash, the flash is performed for all three areas of firmware image 2 without any version check.

Initial

Both active and inactive firmware are flashed.

Readme

The Readme file is opened.

Reboot

An iRMC S4 warm start is performed.

English

/ German

Specify keyboard layout. German is set by default.

Start the required update variant by clicking on the corresponding button.

During the firmware update, the console informs you about the progress of the update operation. If an error occurs, the update operation is aborted. A corresponding return code is reported (see

page 410

Once the update operation has been completed, click on Exit, to close the

FlashDisk menu.

Ê Remove the USB memory stick from the managed server.

Ê Restart the managed server (e.g. with [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]).

406

iRMC

Emergency flash

10.4 Emergency flash

If the iRMC S4 firmware can no longer be executed, e. g. because the SDRs are not compatible with the system, then you can use the emergency mode to start the firmware running again. In emergency mode, the system automatically branches to the bootloader and is the ready for the firmware update.

Emergency mode is indicated by the error LED (global error LED) (red) and the identification LED (blue) flashing alternately.

To switch the managed server to emergency mode and then update the iRMC S4's firmware, proceed as follows:

Ê Disconnect the power supply connector.

Ê Insert the connector in the socket again with the Identify key held down.

The managed server is now in emergency mode.

Boot the server to DOS and use the recovery flash procedure to update the iRMC S4’s firmware.

If the firmware is not active then the boot operation may take up to 2 minutes to start. You can ignore the error message “iRMC S4

Controller Error” which the BIOS outputs during this period.

iRMC S4

407

Flash tools

10.5 Flash tools

The flirmcs4, w64flirmcs4, and linflirmcs4 w32flirmcs4 differ only in respect of the name and the environment in which they are called. This means that the description below also applies to these tools. Instead of

“w32flirmcs4”, you simply enter “flirmcs4”, “w64flirmcs4” or “linflirmcs4” as appropriate.

Syntax

w32flirmcs4 <filename> [<Option>]...

<Filename> without flash options: Update firmware (same as /u)

Options

/h or /? Show this Help Info

/v Show the actual program version of ’w32flirmcs4’

/vNoDriverLoad Show the actual program version of ’w32flirmcs4’

/o Show the actual revisions of the firmware

/1 Flash 1st EEPROM with version check

/2 Flash 2nd EEPROM with version check

/f1 Flash forced 1st EEPROM without version check

/f2 Flash forced 2nd EEPROM without version check

/fi Flash forced inactive EEPROM without version check

/i Flash inactive EEPROM with version check

/u Flash inactive EEPROM if new version is greater than active EEPROM

/wr Initiate a warm reset of the firmware

/s [0-2] Show/Set FW Upload Selector

0: Auto inactive image

1: Image 1, low firmware image

2: Image 2, high firmware image

408

iRMC

Flash tools

/b [0-5] Show/Set FW Boot Selector

0: Auto select higher firmware version

1: Image 1, low firmware image

2: Image 2, high firmware image

3: Auto select lower firmware version

4: Auto select most recently programmed firmware

5: Auto select least recently programmed firmware

/n No console output, no user entry necessary

/noUserEntry No user entry necessary, but with console output

/logError[file] Write errors to logfile, default: w32flirmcs4.logError

/logOutput[file] Write each terminal output to logfile,

default: w32flirmcs4.logOutput

/logDebug[file] Write each internal debug output to logfile,

default: w32flirmcs4.logDebug

/ignore Flash the selected EEPROM without any checks (FW version, SDR ID)

/d [0-99] [0-99] Additional debug output [verbose level]

a) without verbose level: print whole debug output

b) one verbose level: print debug output <= verbose level

c) two verbose level: print debug output between

1st and 2nd verbose level

/e Emulation test mode (no access to iRMC, for test only)

/noExitOnError No exit and continue program after error (for test only)

99: No flash because EEPROM firmware is actual iRMC S4

409

Flash tools

Return codes

Value

Meaning

No error, program successfully terminated.

Arguments missing or not correct.

Firmware upload selector value out of range (0-2).

Firmware boot selector value out of range (0-5).

Firmware image file missing.

Firmware image file could not be opened.

Communication with BMC not possible

Incorrect completion code of the IPMI command.

The system has no iRMC S4.

SDR ID of the system and the flash image file are not the same.

Cannot allocate memory buffer.

File transfer failed.

IPMI call failed (response data size is 0).

HTI interface is not available.

HTI interface detection failed (other detection error).

HTI interface detection failed (ScSBB2.sys driver not available).

Connecting to HTI failed.

Flash process failed.

Error completion code of [F5 0B Start TFTP Flash]: 0xCB.



Data not present (TFTP Server could not provide the requested image file)

Error completion code of [F5 0B Start TFTP Flash]: 0xD3.



Destination unavailable (TFTP Server is not reachable).

Unknown completion code of [F5 0B Start TFTP Flash].

Wrong file size of the firmware image file.

Seek error with the firmware image file.

GetFullPathName failed.

Cannot load image because flash status is 0x04 (image download in progress).

Cannot load image because flash status is 0x08 (flash in progress).

Unexpected flash status of the iRMC before loading file.

Firmware image file does not exist.

Unexpected IPMI command response data size.

Table 24: Return codes of the flash tools

410

iRMC

Value

Table 24: Return codes of the flash tools

Meaning

Unexpected return value from HTI function.

The operating system cannot run this application program.

Flash tools

iRMC S4

411

11 Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC S4

This chapter gives an overview on how you to use the ServerView Installation

Manager (abbreviated to Installation Manager below) and the iRMC features

"Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" and "Virtual Media" to install the operating system on the managed server from the remote workstation.

The chapter discusses the following specific topics:

– General procedure for the remote installation of an operating system using storage media which are provided via the "Virtual Media" feature. In the following, storage media provided via the "Virtual Media" feature are referred to as virtual storage media for short.

– Booting the managed server from the remote workstation using the

ServerView Suite DVD 1 (Windows and Linux).

– Installing Windows from the remote workstation after configuration on the managed server.

– Installing Linux from the remote workstation after configuration on the managed server.

The description focuses primarily on the handling of the virtual storage media.

It is assumed that readers are familiar with the Installation Manager functionality

(see the manual "ServerView Installation Manager").

Prerequisites for the remote installation of the operating system via

iRMC S4:

– The iRMC’s LAN interface must be configured



(see

page 43

– The license key for the use of the iRMC functions “Advanced Video

Redirection (AVR)” and “Virtual Media” must be installed (see

page 176

iRMC S4

413

General procedure

11.1 Installing the operating system via iRMC S4

- general procedure

For the Installation Manager, the remote installation of the operating system via iRMC represents a local configuration and installation of the operating system on the managed server which you perform from the remote workstation via the

AVR window using virtual media.

The following steps are required in order to perform an installation via the

Installation Manager:

1. Connect the virtual storage medium (DVD or Installation Manager boot image) from which you want to boot as virtual storage medium.

2. Boot and configure the managed server via DVD or the Installation Manager boot image.

3. Use the Installation Manager at the remote workstation to install the operating system on the managed server.

Installing Windows without the Installation Manager using the Windows installation CD/DVDs

You can perform a remote installation of Windows via Virtual Media either using the Installation Manager or exclusively using the Windows installation

CD/DVDs. The two procedures correspond in terms of the handling of the virtual storage media.

However, you are advised to install Windows via the Installation Manager for the following reasons:

– The Installation Manager itself identifies the required drivers and copies these to the system.

– All the Installation Manager functions are available to you during installation.

This means that you can, for example, configure the entire system including the server management settings.

– Installations without the Installation Manager have to be controlled via the keyboard since the mouse cursor cannot be synchronized during the installation process. In contrast, if you install using the Installation Manager then all configuration and installation steps can be performed using the mouse.

414

iRMC

General procedure

– If you install without the Installation Manager then all the settings required for mouse cursor synchronization must subsequently be performed manually.

– Installation using the Installation Manager does not take significantly longer than installation using the operating system CD/DVDs.

Installing Linux without the Installation Manager using the Linux installation CD/DVD

If you know which drivers are required by the system then you can start the

Linux installation by booting from the Linux installation CD/DVD.

If the installation requires you to integrate drivers from the floppy disk then, before starting the installation, you must set up a virtual media connection.

– to the storage medium (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM or ISO image) from which you want to boot and

– if necessary to storage medium for driver installation.

iRMC S4

415

Remote Storage connections

11.2 Connecting a storage medium as Virtual

Media

The Virtual Media functionality makes a “virtual” drive available which is located elsewhere in the network.

The source for the virtual drive can be:

– Physical drive or image file at the remote workstation. The image file may also be on a network drive (with drive letter, e.g. “D:” for drive D).

– Image file provided centrally in the network via Remote Image Mount.

For detailed information on the "virtual Media" feature, see chapter "Virtual

Media Wizard" on page 111 .

Connecting a storage medium as virtual storage medium at the remote workstation

Proceed as follows at the remote workstation to establish the virtual media connection:

Ê Log into the iRMC web interface with Remote Storage Enabled permission

(see

page 122

Open the Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) page and start the AVR (see

page 324

Ê Start “Virtual Media” in the AVR window (see

page 113 ).

Ê Prepare the storage media as virtual storage media (see

page 116 ):

– If installation is performed via the Installation Manager:

ServerView Suite DVD 1 or an Installation Manager boot image and optionally a formatted USB memory stick as a status backup medium.

– If installation is performed from the vendor’s installation CD/DVD:

Windows or Linux installation CD/DVD and optional drivers.

It is recommended that the ServerView Suite DVD 1 and the operating system installation CD/DVD are stored in a folder as an image file (ISO image) and that they are connected from there as virtual storage media or provided via Remote Image Mount.

416

iRMC

Remote Storage connections

The prepared storage media are displayed in the Virtual Media dialog box.

Figure 256: Storage Devices dialog box: ServerView Suite DVD 1 ISO image

Ê Click Connect to connect the DVD ROM drive (DVD) or the Installation

Manager boot image as virtual storage media.

Connect the ISO image (image file) provided via Remote Image Mount

You can use an image file provided via Remote Image Mount for booting from an Installation Manager boot image.

For details on how to provide an image file via Remote Image Mount, see

section "Remote Image Mount - connecting remote ISO images" on page 335 :

iRMC S4

417

Booting from DVD 1

11.3 Booting the managed server from

ServerView Suite DVD 1 and configuring it with the Installation Manager

Proceed as follows at the remote workstation:

Ê Use the iRMC web interface to start up the managed server or reboot the

server (see page 201 ). You can follow the progress of the boot process in

the AVR window.

During the managed server’s BIOS POST phase, virtual storage media are displayed as USB 2.0 devices. Virtual storage media are represented by the following entries in the BIOS boot sequence:

– A (physical) floppy disk is represented by a separate entry

“FTS RemoteStorage FD-(USB 2.0)”.

– All other virtual storage device types are represented by the shared entry

“CD-ROM DRIVE”.

If a local CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive and a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive connected as virtual media are both present at the managed server then the managed server boots from the CD-ROM/DVD-

ROM drive provided via Virtual Image.

Press [F2] while the server is booting.

Ê In the UEFI set-up, open the menu Boot in which you can define the boot sequence.

Specify Boot Priority=1 (highest priority) for the ServerView Suite DVD 1 which is connected as virtual storage medium.

Ê Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup.

The managed server then boots from ServerView Suite DVD 1 which is connected as virtual storage.

If the system does not boot from the virtual storage medium

(ServerView Suite DVD 1 or Installation Manager boot image):

Ê Check whether the storage medium is displayed during the BIOS

POST phase and connect the storage medium as a virtual medium if necessary.

Ê Make sure that the correct boot sequence is specified.

418

iRMC

Booting from DVD 1

It takes about 5 minutes to boot from ServerView Suite DVD 1 via a virtual storage medium. The boot progress is indicated during the boot process. Once the boot process has completed, the Installation Manager startup displays a dialog box in which you are asked to select a medium for the status backup area

(status backup medium).

Ê Choose Standard mode as the Installation Manager mode.

Specify whether the configuration data is to be stored on a local replaceable data medium or on a network medium:

Please note that if you do not select any status backup option all the configuration data is lost when you reboot.

Status backup medium

The backup medium must not be write-protected.

A USB stick must already be connected to the USB port when the system is booted. If you fail to do this and wish to save the configuration file: Connect the USB stick now and reboot from

ServerView Suite DVD 1.

Ê Choose the option on local drive (floppy / USB stick).

Ê Select the corresponding drive in the box to the right of this option.

For more detailed information on creating Installation Manager status disks, see the manual “ServerView Installation Manager”.

Connecting the status medium and/or the installation media via the network

Ê Set up the required shares for this purpose.

If you are making a medium with a prepared configuration file and/or an installation medium available via the network, you have to choose this option. Depending on your infrastructure, you can either obtain a temporary IP address via DHCP or manually configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address for the current Installation Manager session.

Ê Start the Installation Manager by clicking Continue.

iRMC S4

419

Booting from DVD 1

Starting local deployment

The Welcome screen appears when you start the Installation Manager:

Figure 257: Installation Manager - Welcome screen

Click Deployment to start preparation of the local installation (deployment).

To prepare the installation, the Installation Manager wizards take you through a sequence of configuration steps that gather specifications for configuring the system and for subsequent unattended installation of the operating system.

Configure the local CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of the managed server as the installation source. You can then also make the Windows installation CD/DVD available from the CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of the remote workstation if you connect it to the managed server as a virtual storage medium (see

section "Installing Windows on the managed server after configuration" on page 421

Once you have completed configuration with the Installation Manager, the

Installation Info

dialog page for the Windows installation (see

page 421

) or for

the Linux installation (see page 423 ) is displayed. This allows you to start the

installation process.

420

iRMC

Installing the operating system

11.4 Installing the operating system on the managed server after configuration

Once you have completed configuration, you should install the operating system on the managed server.

11.4.1 Installing Windows on the managed server after configuration

After configuration has been completed, the Installation Manager displays the following dialog page:

Figure 258: Installation Manager - Installation Info page

If you have configured the local CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of the managed server as the installation source, proceed as follows at the remote workstation:

Ê Clear your currently active virtual connections. For more detailed information

on clearing virtual media connections, see page 119

iRMC S4

421

Installing the operating system

Ê Remove ServerView Suite DVD 1 from the DVD ROM drive at the remote workstation.

Insert the Windows installation CD/DVD in this DVD ROM drive.

Close the application if autostart is active.

Ê Connect the CD ROM/DVD ROM drive containing the Windows installation

CD/DVD as virtual storage medium.

In the Installation Info page of the Installation Manager, click Start installation.

All the installation files are copied to the managed server.

The Installation Manager opens a confirmation dialog page when the copy operation is complete and prompts you to remove all the storage media from the removable media drives before the managed server is rebooted.

Before rebooting the system, you must in particular shut down all current virtual media connections.

To shut down all current virtual media connections, proceed as follows:

Start “Virtual Media” (see

page 113 ).

The Virtual Media dialog box is displayed with the currently connected virtual storage devices.

“Safely remove” the storage device, i.e. ensure that no more applications/programs are accessing the storage media.

Ê Click all Disconnect... buttons to remove all the virtual storage connections.

On the confirmation dialog page, click Ok to reboot the managed server.

Once the managed server has rebooted, you can monitor the entire installation by means of the AVR.

422

iRMC

Installing the operating system

11.4.2 Installing Linux on the managed server after configuration

The mouse can be used but not synchronized during Linux installation.



Whenever you change a virtual storage medium, you must remove the virtual media connection for the currently connected medium and then connect the new medium as a virtual storage medium.

After configuration has been completed, the Installation Manager displays the following dialog page:

Figure 259: Installation Manager - Installation Info

If you have configured the local CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of the managed server as the installation source, proceed as follows at the remote workstation:

Ê Clear your currently active virtual media connections. For more detailed

information on clearing virtual media connections, see page 119 .

Remove ServerView Suite DVD 1 from the



DVD ROM drive at the remote workstation.

iRMC S4

423

Installing the operating system

Ê Insert the Linux installation CD/DVD in this DVD ROM drive.

Close the application if autostart is active.

Connect the CD ROM/DVD ROM drive containing the Linux installation

CD/DVD as virtual storage medium.

Ê In the Installation Info page of the Installation Manager, click Start installation.

All the installation files are copied to the managed server. The Installation

Manager opens a confirmation dialog page when the copy operation is complete and prompts you to remove all the storage media from the removable media drives before the managed server is rebooted.

Before rebooting the system, you must in particular shut down all current virtual media connections.

Ê Before rebooting the system, shut down the current virtual media connections.

To do this, proceed as follows:

Start “Virtual Media” (see

page 113 ).

The Virtual Media dialog box is displayed with the currently connected virtual media devices.

Click all Disconnect buttons to remove all the virtual media connections.

“Safely remove” the storage device, i.e. ensure that no more applications/programs are accessing the storage media.

Ê On the confirmation dialog page, click Ok to reboot the managed server.

Once the managed server has rebooted, you can monitor the entire installation by means of the AVR.

424

iRMC

12 Appendix

The appendix provides you with information about the following topics:

–

"IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC" on page 425

–

"Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration" on page 452

12.1 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

This section describes a selection of OEM-specific IPMI commands supported by the iRMC S4.

12.1.1 Overview

The following OEM-specific IPMI commands are supported by the iRMC:

● SCCI-compliant Power On/Off commands



(SCCI: ServerView Common Command Interface)

– 0115 Get Power On Source

– 0116 Get Power Off Source

– 011C Set Power Off Inhibit

– 011D Get Power Off Inhibit

●

– 0120 Set Next Power On Time

SCCI-compliant communication commands

– 0205 System OS Shutdown Request

– 0206 System OS Shutdown Request and Reset

●

– 0208 Agent Connect Status

– 0209 Shutdown Request Canceled

SCCI-compliant signaling commands

– 1002 Write to System Display iRMC S4

425

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

● Firmware-specific commands

– 2004 Set Firmware Selector

– 2005 Get Firmware Selector

– C019 Get Remote Storage Connection

●

– C01A Set Video Display on/off

BIOS-specific command

– F109 Get BIOS POST State

– F115 Get CPU Info

● iRMC S4-specific commands

– F510 Get System Status

– F512 Get EEPROM Version Info

– F542 Get HDD lightpath status (Component Status Signal Read)

– F543 Get SEL entry long text

– F545 Get SEL entry text

– F5B0 Set Identify LED

– F5B1 Get Identify LED

– F5B3 Get Error LED

– F5DF Set Nonvolatile Cfg Memory to Default Values

– F5E0 Set Configuration Space to Default Values

– F5F8 Delete User ID

426

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

12.1.2 Description of the IPMI OEM commands

The following sections describe the individual OEM-specific IPMI commands.

12.1.2.1 Description format

The OEM-specific IPMI commands contained in this chapter are described in the format used by the IPMI standard for describing IPMI commands.

The IPMI standard describes the IPMI commands using command tables which list the input and output parameters for each command.

You can find information on the IPMI standards on the Internet under:

http://developer.intel.com/design/servers/ipmi/index.htm

iRMC S4

427

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

12.1.2.2 SCCI-compliant Power On/Off commands

01 15 - Get Power On Source

This command returns the reason for the most recent Power On. The possible reasons are listed below.

Request Data

Response Data -

1:3

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

01 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

15 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

01 Data Length

Power on Source: Cause of last power on

Power on

Source

0x00

0x01

0x02

0x03

0x04

0x05

0x08

0x09

0x0C

0x15

0x16

0x1A

0x1D

0x1E

Description

Software or command

Power switch (on the front panel or keyboard)

Automatic restart after power failure

Clock or timer (hardware RTC or software timer)

Automatic restart after fan failure shutdown

Automatic restart after critical temperature shutdown

Reboot after watchdog timeout

Remote on (modem RI line, SCSI termination power, LAN, chip card

 reader...)

Reboot after a CPU error

Reboot by hardware reset

Reboot after warm start

Powered on by a PCI Bus Power Management Event

Powered on by remote control via remote manager

Reboot/reset by remote control via remote manager

428

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

01 16 - Get Power Off Source

This command returns the reason for the most recent Power Off. The possible reasons are listed below.

Request Data

Response Data

2:4

1:3

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

01 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

16 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

01 Data Length

Power off Source: Cause of last power off

Power off

Source

0x00

0x01

0x02

0x03

0x04

0x05

0x08

0x0C

0x1D

Description

Software (SWOFF, power off by command)

Power switch (on the front panel or keyboard)

AC power fail

Clock or timer (hardware RTC or software timer)

Fan failure

Critical temperature

Final power-off after repeated watchdog timeouts

Final power-off after repeated CPU errors

Powered off by remote control via remote manager iRMC S4

429

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

01 1C - Set Power Off Inhibit

This command sets the Power Off Inhibit flag, which temporarily suppresses any unfounded attempt to power down the server.

If the Power Off Inhibit flag is set, the firmware saves the cause of any attempt to perform a “Power Off”, “Power Cycle” or restart of the server, but does not perform the action. The cause of the most recent attempt to perform a “Power

Off”, “Power Cycle” or restart of the server is always saved at any given time.

The stored action is only performed when the Power Off Inhibit flag is reset.

The Power Off Inhibit flag is automatically reset after a power failure or when the reset button is pressed.

The effect of the Power Off Inhibit flag is the same as that of the Dump flag used when creating a main memory dump. In this case, the initiator must set the flag before making the dump and reset it when the dump is complete.

Request Data

Response Data -

2:4

1:3

6:7

B8 NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group

01 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

1C Command Specifier

00 Object ID

00 00 Value ID

01 Data Length

Power Off Inhibit Flag: 0 no Inhibit, 1 Inhibit

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

430

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

01 1D - Get Power Off Inhibit

This command gets the value of the Power Off Inhibit flag.

For further details on the Power Off Inhibit flag, see the description of

"01 1C - Set Power Off Inhibit" on page 430

Request Data

Response Data

2:4

1:3

B8 NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group

01 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

1D Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

01 Response Data Length

Power Off Inhibit Flag: 0 no Inhibit, 1 Inhibit iRMC S4

431

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

01 20 - Set Next Power On Time

This command switches on a system at the given time independent of the stored

On/Off times in the Configuration Space.

The command takes effect only once.

You cancel a “Power On” time previously set with a 01 20 command by specifying the “Power On” time “0” in a subsequent 01 20 command.

Request Data

Response Data

6:7

9:12

2:4

1:3

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

01 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

20 Command Specifier

00 Object ID

00 00 Value ID

04 Data Length

Time (LSB first) (see below)

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

Time (LSB first)

Time (UNIX-specific format) when the system switches on again. Time is

NOT stored in non-volatile memory. Resolution is 1 minute. After the system has switched on, Time is set to 0 internally.



If Time == 0, the system is not switched on.

432

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

12.1.2.3 SCCI-compliant communication commands

Die SCCI-compliant communication commands require that the Agent

Service is running under the OS. To execute the commands, the iRMC S4 communicates with Agent which finally performs the action.

02 05 - System OS Shutdown Request

This command initiates shutdown of the server’s operating system.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

02 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

05 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

02 06 - System OS Shutdown Request and Reset

This command initiates the shutdown of the server’s operating system and subsequently restarts the system.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

02 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

06 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first iRMC S4

433

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

02 08 - Agent Connect Status

This command checks whether the agent is active.

Request Data

Response Data

2:4

1:3

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

02 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

08 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

01 Data Length

Connect Status:



00 = Connection lost, agent not connected.



01 = Connection re-established, agent connected.

02 09 Shutdown Request Cancelled

This command cancels a shutdown request that has been issued.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

02 Cmd : Command Group Communication

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

09 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

434

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

12.1.2.4 SCCI-compliant signaling command

10 02 - Write to System Display

This command is used to write characters to the LocalView display (if connected).

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

10 Cmd : Command Group Fan Test

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

02 Command Specifier

6:7

Object Index: : Line on Display to write on.

Value ID (not used)

Length Number of characters to write, incremented by one. (The string need not be null-terminated; characters exceeding the length of a display line are truncated.)

Attribute:



0 = Write String left aligned.



1 = Write String centered.

10:10+n Characters to write to the display; string need not be nullterminated.

2:4

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first iRMC S4

435

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

12.1.2.5 Firmware-specific commands

20 04 - Set Firmware Selector

This command configures the firmware image of the iRMC which is to be active after a firmware reset.

Request Data

Response Data -

20 NetFnlLUN: Firmware

04 CMD : Command Group Firmware

Selector:



0 = Auto (Select firmware image with highest firmware



version.)



1 = low firmware image



2 = high firmware image



3 = Auto oldest version (Select firmware image with oldest



firmware version.)



4 = MRP (Select most recently programmed firmware.)



5 = LRP (Select least recently programmed firmware.)

Completion Code

436

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

20 05 - Get Firmware Selector

This command returns the current firmware selector setting.

Request Data

Response Data

20 NetFnlLUN: Firmware

05 CMD : Command Group Firmware

Completion Code

Next Boot Selector:



0 = Auto (Select EEPROM with highest firmware version.)



1 = low EEPROM



2 = high EEPROM



3 = Auto oldest version (Select EEPROM oldest firmware

version.)



4 = MRP (Select most recently programmed firmware.)



5 = LRP (Select least recently programmed firmware.)

Running Selector; tells which firmware is currently running:



1 = low EEPROM



2 = high EEPROM iRMC S4

437

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

C0 19 - Get Remote Storage Connection or Status

Depending on the parameters passed, this command returns information on

– whether any Remote Storage connections are available,

– the status and type of any Remote Storage connection(s).

If Request Data 1 is set to “1”, the command returns information as to whether storage media are connected as Remote Storage.

Request Data

Response Data

C0 NetFnlLUN: OEM

19 CMD : Command Group Firmware

Completion Code

00: No



01: Yes, connected

438

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

If Request Data 1 is set to “2”, the command returns information on the status and type of any Remote Storage connection(s).

Request Data

Response Data

C0 NetFnlLUN: OEM

19 CMD : Command Group Firmware

00 = Connection 0



01 = Connection 2

Completion Code

00 = Invalid / unknown



01 = idle



02 = Connection Attempt pending



03 = Connected



04 = Connection Attempts retries exhausted / failed



05 = Connection lost



06 = Disconnect pending

00 = Invalid / unknown



01 = Storage Server / IPMI



02 = Applet



03 = None / Not connected iRMC S4

439

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

C0 1A - Set Video Display On/Off

This command allows you to switch the local console on or off.

Request Data

Response Data -

C0 NetFnlLUN: OEM

1A Cmd : Command Group Fan Test

00 = Set Video Display On



01 = Set Video display Off

Completion Code

12.1.2.6 BIOS-specific commands

F1 09 - Get BIOS POST State

This command provides information whether BIOS is in POST.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F1 Cmd : Command Group BIOS

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

09 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

[7:1] - reserved



[0] - BIOS POST State : 0 = BIOS is not in POST

1 = BIOS is in POST

440

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F1 15 - Get CPU Info

This command returns CPU-internal information. The iRMC gets this information from the BIOS during the POST phase.

Request Data

Response Data

2:4

5:6

9:10

11:12

1:3

16:17

18:19

20:21

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F1 Cmd : Command Group BIOS

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

15 Command Specifier

Socket Number (0-based) of the CPU

Completion Code:



01 = Unpopulated CPU Socket

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

CPU ID, LS Byte first

Platform ID

Brand ID

Maximal Core Speed of the CPU [MHz], LS Byte first

Intel Qickpath Interconnect in Mega Transactions per second, LS Byte first

T-Control Offset

T-Diode Offset

CPU data Spare

Record ID CPU Info SDR, LS Byte first

Record ID Fan Control SDR, LS Byte first

CPU ID High Word, LS Byte first (0 if none) iRMC S4

441

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

12.1.2.7 iRMC S4-specific commands

F5 10 - Get System Status

This command returns a variety of internal information on the system such as the power state, error status, etc.

Request Data

Response Data

2:4

1:3

5:8

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group Memory

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

10 Command Specifier

Timestamp

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

System Status (For details see below.)

Signaling (For details see below.)

Notifications (For details see below.)

POST Code

The Timestamp is only relevant for evaluating the Notifications Byte.



System Status

Bit 7 - System ON

Bit 6 -

Bit 5 -

Bit 4 - SEL entries available

Bit 3 -

Bit 2 - Watchdog active

Bit 1 - Agent connected

Bit 0 - Post State

442

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

Signaling

Bit 7 Localize LED

Bit 6 -

Bit 5 -

Bit 4 -

Bit 3 CSS LED

Bit 2 CSS LED

Bit 1 Global Error LED

Bit 0 Global Error LED

Notifications

Bit 7 SEL Modified (New SEL Entry)

Bit 6 SEL Modified (SEL Cleared)

Bit 5 - SDR Modified

Bit 4 Nonvolatile IPMI Variable Modified

Bit 3 ConfigSpace Modified

Bit 2 -

Bit 1 -

Bit 0 New Output on LocalView display iRMC S4

443

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 12 - Get EEPROM Version Info

This command returns information on the current versions (bootloader, firmware and SDR) stored in the EEPROM(s).

Request Data

Response Data

8:10

19:20

2:4

1:3

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group Memory

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

12 Command Specifier

EEPROM# 00=EEPROM 1; 01=EEPROM 2

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

Status 00=Checksum Error Runtime FW, 01=OK

Major FW Revision Binary coded

Minor FW Revision BCD coded

Aux. FW Revision Binary coded (major/minor/res.)

Major FW Revision ASCII coded letter

Major SDRR Revision BCD coded

Minor SDRR Revision BCD coded

SDRR Revision Char. ASCII coded letter

SDRR-ID LSB binary coded

SDRR-ID MSB binary coded

Major Booter Revision Binary coded

Major Booter Revision BCD coded

Aux. Booter Revision

Binary coded (major/minor)

444

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 42 - Get HDD lightpath status (Component Status Signal Read)

This command returns information on the state of a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) slot.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

B8 NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group iRMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

42 Command Specifier

Entity ID (Table 37-12 of IPMI 1.5 Spec.) of Component whose Status Signal is to be read.

(8)

2:4

(7)

Entity Instance (0-based) of Component whose Status

Signal is to be read.

Sensor Type (Table 36-3 of IPMISpec.) of the Sensor which reports the Status of the Component to which the Status

Signal is associated.

Option (optional)



Bit 7:2 - Reserved



Bit 1 :Completion Code 0x02 suppressed



Bit 0 - 1 : Return ID String of Component Status Sensor

Completion Code:



01= Status Signal not available



02 = Component not present

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

Signal Status:



00 = ok



01 = Identify



02 = Prefailure Warning



03 = Failure

CSS and Physical LED available:



Bit 6:0 - 0= No physical LED available



Bit 6:0 > 00 = Physical LED available, Single or Multiple

Color, Code



Bit 7 = 0: No CSS Component



Bit 7 = 1: CSS Component

Length of ID String of Component Status Sensor



(only present if Bit 0 in Request Byte 8 is set)

(8 .. m) Length of ID String of Component Status Sensor in ASCII chasracters



(only present if Bit 0 in Request Byte 8 is set) iRMC S4

445

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 43 - Get SEL entry long text

This command translates a given SEL entry into long text.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

5:6

2:4

5:6

7:8

10:13

16:n n + 1

B8 NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group iRMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

43 Command Specifier

Record ID of SEL record, LS Byte first

0x0000: get first record

0xFFFF: get last record

Offset in response SEL text

MaxResponseDataSize size of

Converted SEL data



(16:n) in response

Completion Code:

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

Next Record ID

Actual Record ID

Record type

Timestamp

Severity: Bit 7: 0 = No CSS component



1 = CSS component



Bit 6-4: 000 = INFORMATIONAL



001 = MINOR



010 = MAJOR



011 = CRITICAL



1xx = Unknown’



Bit 3-0: reserved, read as 0000

Data length of the whole text

Converted SEL data requested part



(n = 16 + MaxResponseDataSize - 1)

String Terminator trailing '\0' character

446

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 45 - Get SEL Entry Text

This command translates a given System Event Log SEL entry into ASCII text.

Request Data

Response Data

2:4

5:6

7:8

10:13

1:3

5:6

16:35

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group iRMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

45 Command Specifier

Record ID of SDR, LS Byte first

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first

Next Record ID

Actual Record ID

Record type

Timestamp

Severity: Bit 7: 0 = No CSS component



1 = CSS component



Bit 6-4: 000 = INFORMATIONAL



001 = MINOR



010 = MAJOR



011 = CRITICAL



1xx = Unknown’



Bit 3-0: reserved, read as 0000

Data length

Converted SEL data iRMC S4

447

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 B0 - Set Identify LED

This command allows you to switch the Identify LED (blue) of the server on and off. In addition, you can set and read the GPIOs that are directly connected to the Identify LED.

You can also switch the Identify LED on and off using the Identify switch on the server.

Request Data

Response Data -

2:4

1:3

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group BMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

B0 Command Specifier

Identify LED:



0: Identify LED off



1: Identify LED on

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

F5 B1 - Get Identify LED

This command returns information on the status of the Identify LED (blue) of the server.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group BMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

B1 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

State of Identify LED (only bit 0 is relevant)

448

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 B3 - Get Error LED

This command returns information on the status of the server’s Global Error

LED (red) and CSS LED (yellow). The Global Error LED indicates the most serious error status of the components. The CSS LED indicates, whether the customer himself can rpair the fault.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group BMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

B3 Command Specifier

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first



State of Error LED:



0 : CSS off / GEL off

1 : CSS off / GEL on

2 : CSS off / GEL blink

3 : CSS on / GEL off

4 : CSS on / GEL on

5 : CSS on / GEL blink

6 : CSS blink / GEL off

7 : CSS blink / GEL on

8 : CSS blink / GEL blink iRMC S4

449

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 DF - Reset Nonvolatile Cfg Variables to Default

This command forces all non-volatile IPMI settings to be set to default values.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

5:8

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group BMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

DF Command Specifier

43 4C 52 AA = ’CLR’0xaa: Security Code

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

F5 E0 - Reset ConfigSpace variables to default

This command forces all Configuration Space variables to be set to default values.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

5:8

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group BMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

E0 Command Specifier

43 4C 52 AA = ’CLR’0xaa: Security Code

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

450

iRMC

IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC

F5 F8 - Delete User ID

The system supports up to 16 users. This command allows individual iRMC S4 users to be deleted.

CAUTION!

The system can no longer be managed if all iRMC users are deleted.

Request Data

Response Data

1:3

5:8

2:4

B8 NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group

F5 Cmd : Command Group BMC

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first

F8 Command Specifier

User ID (1-16)

Completion Code

80 28 00 IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first iRMC S4

451

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2 Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

This section provides information on the following topics:

– How to use an SCCI (ServerView Common Command Interface) compliant interface for configuring the iRMC.

– Scripted configuration of the iRMC

12.2.1 iRMC configuration data

Please note that the interface described below is mainly for remote configuration and is not an SCCI implementation. It only uses the SCCI command and configuration definitions and the SCCI file format.

12.2.1.1 Overview

The iRMC stores internal configuration data in separate sections of its NVRAM

(Non-volatile RAM):

– FTS-specific ConfigSpace data, which is addressed by the firmware via an internal description or mapping table.

– Original, manufacturer-specific OMD NVCFG data, which is accessed by offset definitions.

Some configuration data from the original OMD NVCFG data is internally mapped by the firmware to be accessible via ConfigSpace access methods. For instance, DNS servers and DNS configuration of the iRMC can be accessed both via IPMI OEM LAN configuration parameters and via ConfigSpace. Both methods access the same low level data structures in the original NVCFG area.

Non-iRMC-specific ServerView software components (e.g. the ServerView

Agents or the Server Configuration Manager) in some cases also map standard

IPMI related commands and configuration items, such as standard IPMI user configuration or IPv4 network configuration. This implements an abstraction level between the IPMI BMC layer and higher software levels.

452

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

The SCCI is a generic application programming interface (API) defined by

Fujitsu for different Server Management Controller hardware as well as Server

Management software (e.g. ServerView Agents). It can be easily extended to cover new commands or new configuration items. For an architectural overview of the SCCI, see the online help of the ServerView agents.

The iRMC supports remote configuration and limited scripting via the

/config URL

in the iRMC S4.

Benefits of remote iRMC configuration via web-based access

Remote configuration of the iRMC via web-based access provides the following benefits:

– Uses HTTP POST operation for uploading files onto the iRMC. No special tool is required. Any generic tool or scripting environments supporting authenticated HTTP POST operations can be used. Sample scripts can be found on the ServerView Suite DVD 2.

– Uses built-in authentication and authorization methods of the iRMC Web server.

– Supports HTTP 1.1 Basic and Digest authentication based on RFC 2617 with local iRMC user accounts.

– Features optional built-in strong encryption with standard HTTPS-based access.

– Can be used with global user accounts (managed by an LDAP directory service) and HTTP 1.1 Basic authentication.

If HTTP 1.1 Basic authentication is used, it is recommended that, for encryption and confidentiality reasons, you use the HTTPS protocol to protect the username/password combination.

– Uses a configuration file format that is based on XML. You have the option to edit the file manually, or to export it from a reference installation or from the Server Configuration Manager.

The configuration file can be re-used with other SCCI based installation methods (e.g. Server Configuration Manager).

– Can be easily extended to new configuration items and new supported SCCI commands.

iRMC S4

453

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2.1.2 SCCI file format

The format of the XML configuration file (.pre) used is taken from the setup configuration help file that is installed together with the ServerView agents on Windows platforms. A copy of this description with iRMC S4specific notes is shown below.

The configuration file is a based on XML syntax:

– Each configuration setting consists of a simple XML fragment starting with a "<CMD>" tag.

– The complete sequence of configuration settings is enclosed in a pair of tags

"<CMDSEQ> and </CMDSEQ>".

The following is an example of a typical command sequence comprising two configuration settings:

<CMD Context="SCCI" OC="ConfigSpace" OE="3800" OI="0"

Type="SET">

<CMD Context="SCCI" OC="ConfigSpace" OE="3801" OI="0"

Type="SET">

</CMDSEQ>

The Context parameter is used internally to select the provider of the operation.

Currently, SCCI is the only supported provider.

454

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

Parameters of SCCI provider-specific commands

The following SCCI-provider-specific commands are available:

Operation Code (OC)

Hex value or string specifying the command / operation code.

The iRMC only supports a limited set of SCCI commands. For a list of supported commands see

table "SCCI commands supported by the iRMC" on page 460

Operation Code Extension (OE)

Hex value for extended operation code. Default: OE=0

For ConfigSpace Read-/Write operations, this value defines the

ConfigSpace ID.

Object Index (OI)

Hex value selecting an instance of an object. Default:OI=0"

Operation Code Type (Type)

For configuration settings, the values GET (read operation) and SET (write operation) are supported. Default: Type=GET

SET operations require data. For specifying the appropriate data type, use the Data (DATA) parameter described below.

Cabinet Identifier (CA)

Allows you to select an extension cabinet and use its cabinet ID number.

Do not use this parameter to request for the system cabinet!

Data (DATA)

If a SET parameter (write operation) is specified: Data type (Type parameter), and, in some cases, data length (LEN parameter) are required.

Currently, the following data types are supported:

– xsd::integer

Integer value

Example

<DATA Type="xsd::integer">1234</DATA> iRMC S4

455

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

– xsd::hexBinary

Stream of bytes. Each byte is coded in two ASCII characters. Use the

Len

parameter as shown in the example below to specify the length of the stream (i.e. the number of bytes).

The data type xsd::hexBinary can be used without any restriction. The number of bytes used is determined by the Len parameter.

Example

A stream of four bytes 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x04 will be coded as the following ASCII stream:

– xsd::string

Normally used for the transfer of strings. Additionally, the string type can be used for IPv4 addresses and MD5-based user passwords. In this case, the string data is internally converted to the accepted target format.

Transferring encrypted data

A Fujitsu-proprietary data encryption is supported for some sensitive data such as user or service (LDAP/SMTP) access passwords, or the

AVR license key of the iRMC. You can use the iRMC_PWD.exe

program for encrypting password data (see section "Generating encrypted passwords with iRMC_PWD.exe" on page 464

Encrypted="1" must be set in the <DATA> tag to indicate that the data to be written is encrypted.

Examples

Transferring the string "Hello World":

<DATA Type="xsd::string">Hello World</DATA>

Transferring a password as clear (readable) text:

<DATA Type="xsd::string">My Readable Password</DATA>

Transferring an encrypted password:

<DATA Type="xsd::string"

Encrypted="1">TpVlTJwCyHEIsC8tk24ci83JuR9l</DATA>

456

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

Transferring the IPv4 address "192.23.2.4"

CAUTION!

The xsd::string data type is restricted to readable strings, IP addresses and MD5-based user passwords.

For all other data, the xsd::hexbinary data type must be used!

Do not directly specify the characters ä, ö, ü, etc. in strings

unless they are actually needed by the using application!

Both SCCI and the ConfigSpace interface do not store any character encoding information. Thus, any non-US-ASCIIcharacters will be interpreted internally by the using application and therefore should be avoided.

If you do actually need to specify special characters, make sure that you edit and save your file in UTF-8 format including the correct BOM.

Command Status (Status)

After the configuration settings are transferred, the Status contains the result of the operation. If the operation has completed successfully, the value 0 is returned.

For a specification of all public configuration settings (ConfigSpace) see the SCCI_CS.pdf file, which is distributed with the PRIMERGY Scripting

Toolkit.

iRMC S4

457

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2.1.3 Restrictions

All commands specified in the .pre file are normally executed sequentially. The following are exemptions from this rule:

– To prevent broken network connectivity, commands for IPv4 and VLAN network configuration are executed at the end of a command sequence.

– Currently, IPv6 configuration is limited to the configuration of the non-volatile

IPv6 configuration parameters.

As a workaround, you can proceed as follows:

1. Arrange your script as follows: a) At the beginning of the script: Disable IPv6. b) Configure IPv6 parameters.

c) At the end of the script: Enable IPv6

2. Submit the script from an IPv4 address.

– The SSL certificate and the related matching private key are executed at the end of a command sequence. Both components must be present in the same .pre file and are checked for matching each other.

– If a power management operation for the managed server or a reboot of the iRMC is required or desired:

It is recommended (but not required) to run these commands in separate command files. You can achieve this e.g. by splitting the configuration and power management operations into separate tasks.

– Optional time delays between the execution of consecutive commands must implemented outside the script.

For example, you can achieve this as follows:

1. Divide the script appropriately into separate scripts.

2. Use the functional range of the client to insert time delays between sending the individual files.

458

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2.1.4 Exporting / importing configuration data from / on the iRMC S4

The Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings page of the iRMC web interface allows you to save (export) the current iRMC configuration data in a configuration file (.pre).

As well, you can import iRMC configuration data from an existing configuration

file (.pre), i.e. load configuration data onto the iRMC (for details, see section

"Save Configuration - Save iRMC S4 Firmware Settings" on page 181 .)

To import an iRMC configuration, you can alternatively send the corresponding

SCCI command file to the /config URI of the iRMC via the HTTP POST operation. iRMC S4

459

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2.2 Scripted configuration of the iRMC

This section describes provides information on the following topics:

– SCCI commands supported by the iRMC.

– Using various script languages for scripted configuration of the iRMC.

– Generating encrypted passwords with the iRMC_PWD.exe program.

12.2.2.1 List of SCCI commands supported by the iRMC

The SCCI commands supported by the iRMC are shown in table 25

SCCI OpCode SCCI Command String

0xE002 ConfigSpace

0x0111

0x0112

0x0113

0x0204

0x020C

0x0205

0x0206

0x0209

0x0203

0x0250

0x0251

0x0252

PowerOnCabinet

PowerOffCabinet

PowerOffOnCabinet

ResetServer

RaiseNMI

RequestShutdownAndOff

RequestShutdownAndReset

ShutdownRequestCancelled

ResetFirmware

ConnectRemoteFdImage

ConnectRemoteCdImage

ConnectRemoteHdImage

Table 25: SCCI commands supported by the iRMC

Description

ConfigSpace Write

Power On the Server

Power Off the Server

Power Cycle the Server

Hard Reset the Server

Pulse the NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt)

Graceful Shutdown, requires running

Agent

Graceful Reboot, requires running Agent

Cancel a Shutdown Request

Perform a BMC Reset

Connect or Disconnect a Floppy Disk image on a Remote Image Mount (NFS or CIFS Share )

Connect or Disconnect a CD/DVD .iso image on a Remote Image Mount (NFS or CIFS Share )

Connect or Disconnect a Hard Disk image on a Remote Image Mount (NFS or CIFS Share )

460

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2.2.2 Scripting with cURL

The open source command-line tool cURL allows you to transfer data specified with URL syntax. You can download the latest version of the source code as well as precompiled versions for different operating systems from

http://curl.haxx.se/

The following are some examples of how to use curl to send a configuration file to the iRMC.

For details on the curl command line options please refer to the curl documentation.

– HTTP Access with Basic Authentication (default) and the default iRMC S4 admin account: curl --basic -u admin:admin --data @Config.pre http://<iRMC IP address>/config

– HTTP Access with Digest Authentication and the default iRMC admin account curl --digest -u admin:admin --data @Config.pre http://<iRMC IP address>/config

– HTTPS Access with no certificate check (-k) and Digest authentication and the default iRMC admin account: curl --digest -k -u admin:admin --data @Config.pre https://<iRMC IP address>/config

– HTTPS Access with an LDAP user account.

Please note, that for LDAP users you have to specify Basic authentication curl --basic -k -u LDAPuser:LDAPpassword --data @Config.pre https://<iRMC IP address>/config iRMC S4

461

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2.2.3 Scripting with Visual Basic (VB) Script

The following VB script sends a configuration file to the iRMC:

IP_ADDRESS = "<iRMC IP address>"



USER_NAME = "admin"



PASSWORD = "admin"



FILE_NAME = ".\\ConfigFile.pre"



Const ForReading = 1



Set objFSO = CreateObject("Scripting.FileSystemObject")



Set objFile = objFSO.OpenTextFile(FILE_NAME, ForReading)

' --------------------------------------------------------------



On Error Resume Next



Set xmlHttp = CreateObject("Microsoft.XMLHTTP")

 xmlHttp.Open "POST", "http://" & IP_ADDRESS & "/config", False,



USER_NAME, PASSWORD

 xmlhttp.setRequestHeader "Content-Type", "application/x-wwwform-urlencoded"



 xmlHttp.Send objFile.ReadAll



Wscript.Echo xmlhttp.responsexml.xml

462

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

12.2.2.4 Scripting with Python

#!/usr/bin/python3

 import sys

 import httplib2

 from urllib.parse import urlencode



# ==============================================================



# iRMC



USER = 'admin'



PWD = 'admin'



IP_ADDR = '192.168.1.100'



# ==============================================================

 h = httplib2.Http()

# Basic/Digest authentication

 h.add_credentials(USER, PWD)



 def doit(data,ausgabe=sys.stdout):



try:



resp, content = h.request("http://%s/config" % IP_ADDR,

"POST", data)



if resp['status'] == '200'



data = content.decode('utf-8')



print(data,file=ausgabe)



else:



print('STATUS:',resp['status'],file=ausgabe)



print(str(resp),file=ausgabe)



except Exception as err:



print('ERROR:',str(err),file=ausgabe)



print()



# Example 1 - send a configuration file to the iRMC

 try:



data = open('ConfigFile.pre').read()



doit(data)

 except Exception as err:



print('ERROR:',str(err),file=ausgabe)



# Example 2 - Set Config Space Values



# 0x200 (ConfCabinetLocation) and



# 0x204 (ConfSystemContact) direct from the script



LocationContact = '''<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes" ?>

 iRMC S4

463

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration









</CMD>









</CMD>



</CMDSEQ>



'''

 doit(LocationContact % ("Ostsee","Kiel"))

12.2.2.5 Generating encrypted passwords with iRMC_PWD.exe

The Fujitsu Technology Solutions iRMC password encryption and verification

Utility iRMC_PWD.exe is a Win32 program allowing you to generate encrypted passwords for use with SCCI scripting. iRMC_PWD.exe can be used both to encrypt a single password and to generate a SCCI batch file for scripted configuration.

iRMC_PWD standard command line options

[-h] [-?]

This help.

[-v]

Verify an encrypted password string.

[-o] <oid>

The Object ID for the data to be encrypted.

[-u] <username>

Username for the given Object ID (optional).

[-p] <password>

Password for the given Object ID / / encrypted password string to be verified.

[-x] <opCodeExt>

Opcode extension for the ConfigSpace data to encrypt.

464

iRMC

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

[-p] <password>

Password for the given Object ID.



Default: 1452 (ConfBMCAcctUserPassword)

Supported Values:

1452 - ConfBMCAcctUserPassword

1273 - ConfAlarmEmailSMTPAuthPassword

197A - ConfLdapiRMCgroupsUserPasswd

502 - ConfBmcRadiusSharedSecret

1A52 - ConfBmcRemoteFdImageUserPassword

1A62 - ConfBmcRemoteCdImageUserPassword

1A72 - ConfBmcRemoteHdImageUserPassword

1980 - ConfBMCLicenseKey

iRMC_PWD command line output options

[-b]

Creates the output file as a WinSCU BATCH file.

[-f] <Output File>

Specify the output file name.



Default: iRMC_pwd.txt



Default in Batch mode: iRMC_pwd.pre

Example

You want to generate a .pre file that sets/changes the username to admin and the password to SecretPassword for the (existing) user with the oid 2.

To achieve this, enter the following command: iRMC_PWD -o 2 -u admin -p SecretPassword -b

iRMC_PWD

will generate a .pre file with the contents shown in figure 260 on page 466 .

iRMC S4

465

Configuring the iRMC via SCCI and scripted configuration

Figure 260: Contents of the generated .pre file

466

iRMC

iRMC system report

12.3 iRMC system report

System Report is one of the features provided by PRIME COLLECT. Typically, the information is collected by the ServerView agents running on the host operating system and includes various types of hardware and software information. The collected information includes, among others, iRMC information (sensor, IDPROM/FRU, eventlog) as well as software and drivers installed on the host operating, running processes etc.

Even in cases where ServerView agents are not running, a subset of this information, comprising mainly service incidents, can be made available directly out-of-band from the iRMC.

This section describes:

– Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report

– System report items provided by the iRMC.

12.3.1 Scripted download and automatic evaluation of the iRMC report

12.3.1.1 Scripting with cURL

Curl is an open source command line tool for transferring data specified with

URL syntax. The latest version of the source code as well as precompiled versions for different operating systems can be downloaded from

http://curl.haxx.se/

The following are some examples of how to retrieve the

System Report file with cURL from the iRMC, for details of the cURL command line options please refer to the cURL documentation. As default cURL sends the retrieved data to standard output, you can redirect or pipe it into additional processing or save the retrieved data with the –o outputfilename.

– HTTP access with Digest authentication, the default iRMC admin account and saving (-o) to ‘report.xml’: curl --digest –o report.xml -u admin:admin http://192.168.1.100/report.xml

– HTTPS Access with no certificate check (-k) and Digest authentication and the default iRMC admin account: curl --digest -k -u admin:admin https://192.168.1.100/report.xml

iRMC S4

467

iRMC system report

– HTTPS Access with a LDAP user account:

Please note that, for LDAP users, you have to specify basic authentication since the authentication parameters need to be passed to the LDAP server for verification: curl --basic -k -u LDAPuser:LDAPpassword https://192.168.1.100/report.xml

12.3.1.2 Scripting with Visual Basic

Scripting is also possible with Visual Basic. The following VB script retrieves the report.xml from the iRMC and saves it into a local file, also named report.xml:

IP_ADRESSE = "192.168.1.100"



USER_NAME = "admin"



PASSWORD = "admin"



FILE_NAME = ".\\report.xml"



ADDONS = "/report.xml"



' --------------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------



On Error Resume Next



Function SaveBinaryData(FileName, ByteArray)



Const adTypeBinary = 1



Const adSaveCreateOverWrite = 2



Dim BinaryStream



Set BinaryStream = CreateObject("ADODB.Stream")



BinaryStream.Type = adTypeBinary



BinaryStream.Open



BinaryStream.Write ByteArray



BinaryStream.SaveToFile FileName, adSaveCreateOverWrite



WScript.Echo "Antwort:" & BinaryStream.Read



End Function



Set xmlHttp = CreateObject("Msxml2.XMLHTTP")

 xmlHttp.Open "GET", "http://" & IP_ADRESSE & ADDONS, False,

USER_NAME, PASSWORD



 xmlHttp.Send



If InStr(xmlHttp.GetResponseHeader("Content-Type"), "xml") > 0

Then



SaveBinaryData FILE_NAME,xmlHttp.ResponseBody



Else



Wscript.Echo ADDONS &" not found on " &IP_ADRESSE



End If

468

iRMC

iRMC system report

12.3.2 Information Sections

12.3.2.1 List of supported System Report sections in the XML

Section

System

SubSection

BIOS

Processor

Memory

Fans

Temperatures

PowerSupplies

Voltages

IDPROMS

SensorDataRecords

PCIDevices

Remarks/ Limitations

Only BIOS version string from ConfigSpace

Only PCI Vendor and Device Id of cards in slots, no on-board device information

SystemEventLog

InternalEventLog

BootStatus

ManagementControllers Only iRMC S4

Table 26: List of supported System Report sections in the XML

12.3.2.2 Summary section

The generated XML contains as first section a summary section with some information about the date and time of the record creation, the current iRMC’s

IP addresses as well as summary about the number Critical/Major and Warning

(Minor) entries in the SystemEventLog section and it has an inventory list of available sections.

Sample output see below:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>











 iRMC S4

469

iRMC system report



<Company>FUJITSU</Company>



<Computer>iRMCFDAF9F</Computer>











</Created>







<Message>59 important error(s) in event log!</Message>



</Eventlog>



</Errors>







<Message>23 important warning(s) in event log!</Message>



</Eventlog>



</Warnings>

































</Content>



</Summary>



12.3.2.3 BIOS

Since the iRMC has no access to the SMBIOS structures of the server, only a very limited subset of information is provided. Sample output see below.







470

iRMC

iRMC system report

<BiosVersion>V4.6.5.4 R1.0.0 for D3239-

A1x</BiosVersion>



</Type0>



</SMBIOS>



</Bios>

12.3.2.4 Processor

The information generated is based on the F113 and F115 OEM IPMI cmd and is compliant with the CDiagReport.h. Sample Output see below.







<Manufacturer>Intel</Manufacturer>



<Model>



<Version>Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU E3-1270 v3 @

3.50GHz</Version>



<BrandName>Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU E3-1270 v3 @

3.50GHz</BrandName>



</Model>

















</CPU>



</Processor>

12.3.2.5 Memory

The information generated is retrieved by decoding the memory SPD data as well as evaluating the memory status and configuration sensors and is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation. Sample Output see below.









</Module>







<Approved>false</Approved>





 iRMC S4

471

iRMC system report











</Checksum>



<ModuleManufacturer>SK Hynix</ModuleManufacturer>



<ModuleManufacturingDate>2013,4</ModuleManufacturing

Date>



<ModulePartNumber>HMT325U7EFR8A-PB

</ModulePartNumber>





<ModuleSerialNumber

AsString="4C633E39">1281572409</ModuleSerialNumber>



<ModuleType>UDIMM</ModuleType>



<DeviceType>DDR3_SDRAM</DeviceType>

















</SPD>





</Module>

12.3.2.6 Fans

Fan data is retrieved/generated from FAN sensors and is compliant with the

CDiagReport.h

implementation. Sample Output see below.







</Fan>







</Fan>



</Fans>

12.3.2.7 Temperature

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

Sample Output see below.

472

iRMC

iRMC system report













</Temperature>













</Temperature>



…

12.3.2.8 Power Supplies

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

Sample Output see below.







</PowerSupply>



</PowerSupplies>

12.3.2.9 Voltages

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

Sample Output see below.

















</Thresholds>



</Voltage> iRMC S4

473

iRMC system report

12.3.2.10 IDPROMS

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

In addition, the actual name retrieved from the FRU SDR record is provided as

“Name” attribute in the instance tag. Since an entry is quite long, for an example please check a generated file.

12.3.2.11 SensorDataRecords

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

Since an entry is quite long, for an example please check a generated file.

12.3.2.12 PCIDevices

The iRMC does not have any direct access to PCI data and therefore can only report a limited subset on information. This information is based on what the server BIOS has sent with the F119 OEM IPMI cmd and which can be retrieved with the F11A OEM IPMI cmd. Sample Output see below.















<BaseClass>Mass storage controller</BaseClass>



<SubClass>RAID controller</SubClass>



</ConfigSpace>





</Device>



</PCIDevices>

12.3.2.13 SystemEventLog

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

Sample output see below.



<Entry>





<Severity>MINOR</Severity>





<Message>'DIMM-1B': Non Fujitsu Memory Module detected -

Warranty restricted!</Message>



474

iRMC

iRMC system report







<Hex>02 4D 6B F2 52 20 00 04 E1 FE 6F A0 00

03</Hex>



</Line>



</HexDump>



</Data>



</Entry>



…

12.3.2.14 InternalEventLog

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

Sample Output see below.



<Entry>









<Message>iRMC Browser http connection user 'admin' login from 10.172.103.28</Message>



</Entry>



…

12.3.2.15 BootStatus

The information generated is compliant with the CDiagReport.h implementation.

Sample Output see below.









</BootStatus> iRMC S4

475

iRMC system report

12.3.2.16 ManagementControllers

Only information about the hosting iRMC is provided. Sample Output see below.



















</iRMC>



</ManagementControllers>

476

iRMC

โฆษณา